Home

Core Services User Manual

1. Service Charge Package AML Dr Limit 99999999999 AML Daily Cr Limit 99999999999 City AML Daily Dr Limit 99999999999 A Clrg Per Day ag Zip Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status 2 36 Bank Tax ID Specify the identity number under which the bank pays the tax This field is only for information purposes Head Office LO Specify the head office LO By default the system displays the value in this field as 1 Default Bank Currency Specify the currency code of the local currency of the bank The option list displays all valid currency codes maintained in the system Select the appropriate one Start Year Month Specify the starting month of the year for the bank Interest charges capitalization dates for CASA TD products are determined based on the value in this field For example if the value in this field is set as 7 and if the capitalization frequency is set as half yearly at the product level the credit capitalization for the CASA product will take place in June and December every year If the value in this field was 3 then the credit interest capitalization will happen in August and February every year The start month can be different from the financial year of the bank TDS Next Remittance Date Specify the next date on which tax is to be remitted by the bank to the government agents This field is for information purposes only
2. Account Type of transaction Debit Amount Contract Ref No Acct1 Journal Entry 10000 ACCT1 Acct Loan 20000 Laon1 Liability History History Date Overall Limit Utilized Amount 4 Jan 2001 100000 30000 Lines History History Date Line Limit Amount Available Amount Utilization 4 January 2001 Line1 60000 30000 30000 4 January 2001 Line2 40000 40000 0 Line Utilizations History History Date Reference No Line Amount Liability Utilization 4 January 2001 Acct Line1 10000 10000 4 January 2001 Loan1 Line1 20000 20000 Further drill down to the contract screens account balances screen will be possible from the line utilization history level 2 24 Case IV On Day 4 which is the 5 of Jan 2001 the following loan transactions have been processed in the System The data in the History tables after the EOD processes will be as follows The value date of the contract is 2 January 2001 Account Type of transaction Debit Amount Contract Ref No Acct1 Loan 15000 LOAN2 The value date of the contract is 8 January 2001 Account Type of transaction Debit Amount Contract Ref No Acct2 Loan 6000 LOAN3 Liability History History Date Overall Limit Utilized Amount 4 January 2001 100000 30000 5 January 2001 100000 51000 Lines History History Date
3. Date Time Mod No Date Time Record Status Authorization Status 2 31 ISO Code Clearing Bank Code Address 1 to 3 Specify the address of the head office of the bank City Specify the city where the head office of the bank is located State Specify the state where the head office of the bank is located Zip Specify zip code where the head office of the bank is located Country Specify the country where the head office of the bank is situated The option list displays the country codes maintained in the system Choose the appropriate one IBAN Mask Specify the IBAN mask The system will generate IBAN based on the mask specified here The IBAN is usually a combination of ISO country code cheque digit bank identifier code and the account number Last Processing Date The system displays the date on which the end of day EOD process was last run This date is maintained for the first time when the bank starts its operations on Oracle FLEXCUBE Subsequently the system automatically updates this date based on the holiday calendar of the bank Next Processing Date Specify the next process date By default the system displays the next working date after the current process date This date is maintained for the first time when the bank starts its operations on Oracle FLEXCUBE Subsequently the system automatically updates the date based on the holiday calendar of the bank STL Process Date
4. CURRENCY CODE DENM CODE DESCRIPTION VALUE NOTE COIN USD D100 100 dollars 100 00 NOTE USD D50 50 dollars 50 00 NOTE USD D20 20 dollars 20 00 NOTE USD D10 10 dollars 10 00 NOTE USD D5 5 dollars 5 00 NOTE USD D1iN 1 dollar Note 1 00 NOTE USD DiC 1 dollar Coin 1 00 COIN USD C25 25 cents 0 25 COIN USD C10 10 cents 0 10 COIN USD C5 5 cents 0 05 COIN USD C1 1 cent 0 01 COIN 9 2 ORACLE 10 Expressing Amounts in Words 10 1 Introduction You can describe the amounts printed on account statements messages advices etc in words for the benefit of your customers To describe amounts in a specific language you have to maintain the verbal equivalents of numerals in the language You can maintain verbal equivalents of numerals in the Amount Text Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDAMTRN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Amount Text Maintenance Web Page Dialog 21x a Language GER Description GERMAN Tet J jE m Amount Description Prefix One EJ D 50 FIFTY zA O 100 HUNDRED E E4 Currencies fuar Ej Currency Pre Decimal Post Decimal Final Text Text Before Fractions E E Input By MSK2 Date Time 7 3 2000 17 45 10 Modification Number 5 Open p Authorized By Date Time pii Authorized Amount translation details can be maintained as one time maintenance
5. The combined length of the Bank Code and Account Number should not exceed 30 characters 4 2 4 5 Specifying the Mask for Cheque Numbers Specify the following Cheque Number Mask Specify the mask for customer cheques The length of the mask should be 6 and should be defined as NNNNNN where N indicates numeric However system also supports the following mask digits e A Indicates alphabets and e X Indicating alphanumeric Once this parameter is set with the appropriate mask for the check number mask system verifies the first cheque number entered in the screen and based on this entry system generates the subsequent cheque numbers Also the numbers of leaves for the cheque book too follow the cheque number mask specified here 4 22 Whenever the check number is keyed in system validates the keyed in cheque number with the mask maintained for current branch During file upload too system validates all outgoing cheque transactions with the maintained check number mask Also if OC_CHQNO_MASK_VAL_REQ is maintained in the CSTB_PARAM table system validates the cheque number length of 6 digits for outward cheques also The 6 digit numeric cheque number mask is applicable for the Indian scenario alone 4 2 4 6 Indicating Multi Credit Transfer Multi Customer Transfer This option indicates whether or not the branch is Multiple Customer credit transfer compatible Multi Financial Institution Transfer
6. Currency Forward Rates Report Currency Pair Currency Pair Report Format Printer At Client Report Output Printer From Currency Pair Specify the currency pair range of the report The system will include the details of the record from this pair To Currency Pair Specify the currency pair range of the report The system will include the details of the record from this pair 32 19 ORACLE ORACLE Core Services October 2015 Version 11 6 0 0 0 Oracle Financial Services Software Limited Oracle Park Off Western Express Highway Goregaon East Mumbai Maharashtra 400 063 India Worldwide Inquiries Phone 91 22 6718 3000 Fax 91 22 6718 3001 www oracle com financialservices Copyright 2007 2015 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners U S GOVERNMENT END USERS Oracle programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation delivered to U S Government end users are commercial computer software pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation of the programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and
7. Where e bbb is the branch code 2 16 e T indicates the account code e Z is the currency type e CCCCCC is the CIF number of the customer e S is the sequence number for a combination of account code currency type and customer e d is the control number generated by Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm The following example illustrates the manner in which the system calculates the 13 digit for a customer account number using the Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm Assume that the account number of a customer is 000 4 1 123456 1 As per this algorithm the value of each position 1 to 12 is multiplied with the weight for each position the weights are provided by your bank Further the sum of the product obtained is divided by 11 The remainder of the division will determine the value of the 13 digit The position wise weight and account number and the product of weight and number is as follows Position 1 2 3415 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Weight W 2l4l8l5 10l9 I7 13 l6 2 3 5 Acct No N ololo il2 I3 4 5 le l4 l1 l1 Product W N 0 0 0 5 20 27 28 15 36 8 3 I5 Sum of the product 147 Divide the value 147 by 11 to obtain the remainder Remainder 147 11 4 As per this algorithm if the remainder is 10 then the control number will be zero If it is any value other than 10 the remainder itself will be taken as the cont
8. Exchange rates can be defined for currency1 against currency2 or currency2 against currency1 The descriptions of the respective currencies are displayed below Through Currency If the exchange rate for a particular currency pair is not to be maintained specify the Through Currency via which the exchange rate between the currencies should be calculated To maintain a through currency for a currency pair check against the box Through Currency Then choose from the list codes provided against Code Select the currency code which you want to specify as the through currency The exchange rate for the currencies involved in the pair will be calculated using the through currency oe ORACLE white maintaining a pair involving an In currency In Out and In In you can only specify the Euro as the Through Currency Please note that you cannot maintain a Through Currency for a pair constituted by an In currency and the Euro For more details on the manner in which Oracle FLEXCUBE handles the Euro refer the chapter Handling the Euro in this manual Whenever you define a through currency for a currency pair you will not be allowed to specify the following for the pair e Number of units e Spread definition Quotation Method This is the method to be followed for quoting the exchange rate There are two methods direct and indirect In the Direct method
9. Position Entries created Dr Position Eqv 100 000 JPY Cr Position 1000 USD 100 100 000 JPY Dr Position 1600 EUR 62 5 100 000 JPY Cr Position Eqv 100 000 JPY As seen in the table above the actual loan disbursement entries have created an FCY position in both USD and EUR Therefore these two entries will be captured and stored separately as a single entry with the Dr currency bought currency as USD and Credit currency sold currency as EUR The same would be applicable if FCY LCY or LCY FCY transaction is considered In case of accruals revaluation also if position entries are created the corresponding entries will be stored separately for hand off Pair wise Positioning Required will decide whether position creating pair entries need to be stored by the accounting processor separately for handing off to other system Propagate CIF to other Nodes You need to indicate whether or not the CIF number maintained in HO has to be propagated to other branches present in different instances Check this box to indicate the CIF number has to be propagated to other Nodes instances 2 28 Propagate Customer Addresses to Nodes You need to indicate whether or not the customer addresses maintained in HO has to be propagated to other branches present in different instances Check this box to indicate the Customer addresses has to be propagated to other Nodes instances Propagate Bank Instruction Code
10. 3 Currency Exchange Rates iew Web Page Dialog p 21 xl A Authorization Status z Record Status l z Bj Currency1 AUD uh Currency2 EHI Search Advanced Search Reset Records per page fis z disctudia P Go to Page Authorization Status Record Status Branch Code Currency1 Currency2 u e CHO AUD CHF A 0 CHO AUD EUR A 0 CHO AUD GBP A 0 CHO AUD INR A 0 CHO AUD USD Authorization Status Record Status A Authorized C Closed U Unauthorized O Open If the branches pick up the exchange rates maintained by the HO then each time you invoke the currency view screen from a branch it is advisable to update this screen with the latest rate input from the HO To do this click on Refresh Refresh updates the screen with the last exchange rates input 12 1 4 Specifying Limits for Cross Currency Transactions Typically the exchange rates applicable for cross currency funds transfer or teller transactions is defaulted by the system depending upon the preference indicated in the product preferences for the product involving the transaction In your bank for high value cross currency transactions you may want the user to manually enter the exchange rate involved rather than let the system automatically pick up a default rate during transaction input You can define such a preference to be applicable to cross currency transactions involving e A currency pair e A specific product or all product
11. BR2 Liab3 Line2 BR2 BR3 Liab4 Line3 BR3 The Branch Allowed would default as the current branch If you are viewing the records then the system would provide the records for the current branch only As per this example Line1 and Line4 would be available for View change in branch BR1 Similarly if the Branch wise Limit option is checked the records related to the current branch would be shown in the Limits Summary View If Branch wise Limits option is left unchecked then the existing setup would hold good that is you would be able to see all the line facility records for any branch You would also be able to utilize any line during contract input irrespective of the branch it was opened in With the above setup Line Utilization would be tracked at the branch level but liability utilization would be tracked at instance level To go back to the first example if there are 3 instances then for the 3rd instance line 2 and line 3 would be tracked at branch BR2 and BR3 respectively However liability tracking would be a consolidation of line 2 and line 3 Hence Liability tracking would be at the instance level whereas line tracking would be at the branch level For a total utilization of a global customer maintained in HO you would have to generate a report of the limit utilization for each instance Pairwise Positioning Required You have to select this option to indicate whether pair wise positioning ent
12. Enable this option to indicate that your branch is Multi Financial Institution Transfer compatible 4 2 4 7 Specifying Consolidation Suspense General Ledger Incoming GL If your branch is Multi Customer Transfer or Multi Financial Transfer or both enabled you have to mandatorily choose the incoming GL which will be the bridge GL for all incoming MT102 and MT 203 type of transfers Outgoing GL If your branch is Multi Customer Transfer or Multi Financial Transfer or both enabled you have to mandatorily choose the outgoing GL which will be the bridge GL for all outgoing MT102 and outgoing MT 203 type of transfers LDAP DN Template The LDAP DN template needs to be maintained here for each branch This is used in Oracle FLEXCUBE user maintenance form to populate corresponding LDAP user id automatically from the template 4 2 5 Maintaining LCY Message Preference for Branch Click the LCY Msg Pref button in the Preferences screen to invoke the LCY Message Preference screen 4 23 4 2 6 Branch Parameters LCY Message Preferences Description Messages Type 1of1 Go to Page T Module Module Description Local Currency Message Type Specify the following details Module Specify the module code for which you are maintaining the local currency message type preferences You can select the appropriate module code from the option list Module Description The system displays the d
13. button to invoke the Reg Details screen You can specify the Regulation D applicability details in this screen EY REG Details Web Page Dialog A wlx T Reg D Applicable Reg D Periodicity Monthly Statement Cycle None If you indicate the periodicity of Regulation D applicability as Statement Cycle the restricted transactions would be counted over the primary statement cycle defined for the account class om ORACLE The Regulation D applicability details specified for an account class would default to all accounts using the class However you can make changes to these details when you set up a customer account that uses the account class 30 2 17 Assigning Preferred Branches Currencies and Customers In addition to what you have specified in the Account Class Maintenance screen you have the option of specifying the following for an accounts class e List of allowed or disallowed branches and allowed or disallowed currencies e List of allowed and disallowed customer categories and allowed and disallowed customers You can specify the branch and currency preferences through the Account Class Branch and Currency Preferences screen Click Branches Currencies in the Account Class Maintenance screen The Account Class Branch and Currency Preferences screen will be displayed 3 Account Class Branch and Currency Preferences Web Page Dialog wlx Account
14. is created by the system This is an open ended period coinciding with the last day of the financial cycle for details refer to the section System Functions You can maintain the following parameters for each accounting period within a financial cycle Period Code This code identifies the accounting period Enter a code using a maximum of 3 characters alphanumeric For example if your period length is a quarter you can enter Q1 for the first period Q2 for the second Q3 for the third and so on If your period length is a bimonthly you can enter BM1 BM2 If your period length coincides with a month you can input M1 M2 ie ORACLE Start Date This is the first day of the corresponding period End Date This is the last date of the corresponding period End date of a period should always end ona month end Please note e The period codes could be of varying lengths but no gaps should be left between periods e The duration of two periods should not overlap e You can modify the period code of the current or a future period however a past period cannot be modified even if it has not been closed e All details maintained in the Period Code Screen will automatically apply to any new branch opened by you in the Branch Parameters Screen e The current financial cycle code and the current period code are displayed in the Branch Parameters Screen Period Code Status After authorisation you can view whethe
15. From To ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print v Printer Specify the following details Module Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single module or for all modules If you choose Single you need to specify the module for which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid module codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Transactions Indicate the type of transactions that should be covered in the report The following options are available All This branch Posted to Other Branch This branch acted as bridge Products Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single product or for all products If you choose Single you need to specify the product code for which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid product codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one 32 5 ORACLE User Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a transactions entered by all users or a single user If you choose Single you need to specify the user ID based on which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid user IDs maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one From Specify the batch from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation To Specify the batch unti
16. Select Account Class Account Account Class Account Report Preferences All Records Specific Records Account Class 1 Of 1 Account 1 0f1 Report Format Report Output Poe 7 Print Printer At Client Printer You can specify the following parameters Select Account Class Account Select account criteria for generating the report from the following options Account Class Account ORACLE 32 8 Report Preferences Select report preference criteria for generating the report from the following options All Records Specific Records Account Class Specify valid account classes for which you need to generate the report from the adjoining option list if you have selected Account Class Account Specify valid account classes for which you need to generate the report from the adjoining option list if you have selected Account Contents of the Report Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report Body of the Report The following details are displayed Field Name Field Description Date This gives the date for which a future dated transaction is booked for the account Reference This is the reference number of the future dated transacti
17. Specify the current process date for the settlement module The system completes the processing of each module separately during EOD operations Thus the current process date for each module is displayed separately for information purposes TD Process Date Specify the current process date for the term deposit module The system completes the processing of each module separately while running the EOD Thus the current process date for each module is displayed separately for information purposes 2 32 Process Date This indicates the process date GL Process Date Specify the current process date for the general ledger module The system completes the processing of each module separately while running the EOD Thus the current process date for each module is displayed separately for information purposes CHQ Process Date Specify the current process date for the current and savings account CASA module The system completes the processing of each module separately while running the EOD Thus the current process date for each module is displayed separately for information purposes LN Process Date Specify the current process date for the loans module The system completes the processing of each module separately while running the EOD Thus the current process date for each module is displayed separately for information purposes 2 2 2 GL Details Tab You can capture the general ledger details for the bank in the GL Details ta
18. e Loans and Deposits e Money Market 2 22 You can indicate the rate type that is to be used for individual LD and MM transactions while processing the contract Propagate Floating Rates to Branches You have to indicate whether the floating rates maintained at the head office of your bank should be propagated across all the branches of your bank Check the box positioned next to this field to indicate that floating rates need to be propagated across branches Consequently each time you maintain a floating rate for a particular rate code and currency combination at your bank a corresponding floating rate record will be created and sent to all the branches of your bank Limits History Required You can indicate whether date wise limits history needs to be maintained for the Bank If you choose to enable this option the limits history is maintained at the following levels e Liability level history for storing liability records e Limit level history for storing Lines records e Line level history for storing Line Utilization records Conditions for collating Limits History data e There is no retrospective effect on limits history gt Back valued contracts and account transactions do not result in any adjustment to the previous records in the history Such transactions are inserted with the current EOD date Similarly any future dated contracts and account transactions are also inserted with the current EOD dates gt I
19. 30 To 20 Sequence Detail F O Component Order Component Component Type Use in Sequence Generation Component Length Component Value T aj gt Input By PRAGNYA Date Tims 0 2 Modification Number 1 Date Time You can maintain the following details of the sequence format Sequence Code Each sequence format is identified by a unique sequence code You can devise a code comprising a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters Branch Code and Module Code You can maintain the format for a specific branch and module combination Select the branch code and the module code from the option list All authorized and active records will be displayed in the list Alternatively you can maintain a sequence format that will be applicable to all the branches ALL and all the modules AL available in your bank Reset Frequency You need to specify the frequency at which the system will drop and recreate the sequence numbers once again At the reset frequency that you specify all sequence numbers of the sequence format will be dropped and recreated again during the End of Day processing Ten ORACLE The options available are e None e Daily e Monthly e Yearly For example let us assume that the running number in the sequence format is 4 characters long starting from 0001 and the reset frequency is Monthly Further let us assume that the sequence number of the last contract processed on the last day of the mon
20. G01 GL CREDIT MSC Y Y Y Y G02 GL DEBIT MSC Y Y Y Y Available Balance Check Required Select this option if you want the system to check for the availability of funds before posting a debit entry to a customer account The system will check for the available balance in all customer accounts associated with the Transaction Code for which the option is enabled If the available balance check fails i e if the system detects insufficient funds in the customer account it will display a warning message However the system will check for the available balance only if you have selected the Available Balance Check required option for both the transaction code associated with the accounting entry and the Customer Account Class to which the customer s account that is being debited belongs The check will not be performed if the option is not selected in both places i ORACLE Interest and Charges Penalty Inclusion In the transaction code that you use for debit entries to time deposit accounts you must indicate the computation of penalties on debit entries due to withdrawals from the account before the maturity date You must select the IC Penalty Inclusion check box to indicate this Inter Branch in Local Currency This indicates whether inter branch entries passed with this transaction code should be in Local currency If this option is checked the inter branch transactions would be passed in local curren
21. If for a GL you have opted for revaluation split then Revaluation Loss as opposed to Trading Loss is posted into this GL Revalue into This GL account is debited if the result of revaluation is a profit and credited if the result of revaluation is a loss This would typically be the GL code being revalued For all non contingent GLs belonging to the asset or liability categories the system defaults to the GL being revalued If you wish to specify a different account for posting these entries specify by selecting from the list of maintained GLs A list of all GLs would be displayed Select Be ORACLE Trading Profit Account Trading Loss Account This indicates the GL for posting profit loss due to trading revaluation Trading Profit Loss if you have indicated that revaluation split is required for a GL Netting of offset entries A check against this indicates whether the offset entries for all accounts linked to the GL code need to be netted or not If checked a single consolidated entry would be passed one for profit and one for loss Netting of offset entries is applicable only for normal account revaluation and not for accounting entry based revaluation of Income Expense GLs Accounting entry based revaluation of Income Expense GLs Income expense GLs that are marked for entry based revaluation are picked up by the EOD revaluation batch process which executes before the account revaluation batch process ona g
22. Real and Contingent If you specify that such automatic balancing entries must be generated you can also specify the control accounts into which the entries must be booked There are two sets of accounts that you can maintain in the Bank Wide Parameters screen one for mismatches arising out of entries to real accounts and another for mismatches arising out of entries to contingent accounts The relevant Control accounts must therefore be of Real or Contingent nature as defined in the GL Chart of Accounts Such balancing entries will be automatically generated if a mismatch of currency or value date entries or both is involved in any module of Oracle FLEXCUBE except Journal Entry In your Chart of Accounts you must ensure that the following conditions are not indicated for the control accounts that you have specified for the currency mismatch and value date mismatch entries e Position accounting Even if position accounting is set to Yes for the control account the system will not pass any position accounting entries since position accounting is done only for the main set of entries and not for the auto balancing entries e Account revaluation Account revaluation must be set for the control accounts since the effect of revaluing these balances would be offset the effect of revaluing the original GLs the GLs into which the main entries were posted e Direct posting If you post a manual entry to one of the Control Accounts
23. TD Variance for OD Specify the variance that is added to interest rate of a term deposit against which an overdraft is granted When the term deposit is kept as security against an overdraft the OD interest rate is calculated as follows OD interest rate TD interest rate TD variance for OD Week Start Day Specify the day that represents the beginning of the week for the bank The valid options are as follows 2 37 e 1 Monday e 2 Tuesday e 3 Wednesday e 4 Thursday e 5 Friday e 6 Saturday e 7 Sunday This field is used for any processing frequency which is specified as weekly Rate VAT Specify the rate VAT in percentage This is applicable if the Commission on Turnover COT is a percentage for turnover then you need to indicate the rate VAT Amount VAT Specify the amount VAT This is applicable if the Commission on Turnover COT is fixed for turnover Hold Amount Flag Check this box to allow the bank to put a hold on the customer s available balance in case of future transactions The hold will be removed on the value date If you do not check this box the system will post the future dated transaction only on the value date Service Charge Package Specify the service charge package for transactions which do not have account numbers e g Walk In transactions You can select the appropriate package from the option list AML Dr Limit Specify the anti money laundering limit for debit transac
24. These rates are maintained and updated daily or whenever they change in the Floating Rates Maintenance screen The rates can be applied on a loan with or without a spread You can invoke this screen by typing CFDFLTRT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button e Floating Rate maintenance Webpage Dialog iol x Rate Code Branch Code W81 Rate Code Description Currency 5 Effective Date and Amount Slab I F currency Code E o Amount Slab Effective Date Borrow Lend Ind z m 73 cr amp Borrow E zZ E amp Borrow E E Tenor and Interest Rate Details Ba bel ES zj Dl tenne interset Date Fields Input By FUSER Date Time Modification Number E Authorized Authorized By Date Time fv Open A Floating Rate Code identifies a set of rates defined for a combination of Currency Amount Limit Tenor and Effective Date The initial criteria for the rate calculation to happen successfully is that there should be a Zero tenor Non zero tenor based rate slab existing for the particular Buy Sell Indicator with Effective date less than equal to the Value date You can associate a Floating Rate to a contract by linking the Rate Code to the contract The rates defined for the Rate Code will be applied to the contract based on the application preferences that you set up here Branch and Rate Code Specify the b
25. and then the branches The Head Office of your bank is created during installation You only have to create the Regional Offices and the various branches During installation the system automatically populates this screen with the branch code and name of your Head Office that you have specified to the CITIL implementer The Parent branch and the Regional Office fields also default to this branch code To create an RO invoke a new screen Then enter the code and name of the RO against Branch Code and Name respectively You do not need to specify the Regional office because the HO Code is the default for the field All ROs report to the HO Then create all the branches If a branch reports to an RO to specify that RO is the branch s Regional Office select the code you want from the option list provided for this field But before designating you should authorize all the RO records you have created the system will not allow you to use any unauthorized record Diagrammatic Representation HO code and name specified durina installation of FlexCU BE On irvokina panoh Gode _ Branch table er ohw _ HO Code ard Name To create an RO Click on A a Enter RO Code ag Branch Code Enter RO Name aq Name SS al Reports to Parent Branch 23 HO Cock cefaulted Regional Branch 25 HO Code defaulted Authorize AO records To create a branch Enter branch Code aq
26. due obligation status you can input code PD1 PD representing post due obligation The number 1 stands for stage 1 of the post due obligation status Status Description This is the description of the status Enter a description using a maximum of 35 SWIFT characters Example Taking the above example you can input here Past Due Obligation 1 for Loan if you are maintaining status codes for Loans i ORACLE Link to This represents the category of the product asset or liability to which the contract status is applicable Example If you are maintaining status codes for loans or any money market placements click on assets type of product If you are maintaining status codes for deposits click on liability type of products Effective days from Maturity This indicates the number of days after the due date when this status becomes applicable to the contract You can specify any number of days from 0 999 The effective days defined here is defaulted to the product level in the Bills and Loans modules You have the option of redefining the number of days at the product level we ORACLE 18 Transaction Code Maintenance 18 1 Introduction In the Transaction Codes Maintenance screen you define transaction codes to representing various types of transactions for example transfer charges incoming mail transfer incoming telex transfer reserve incoming clearing transfer etc All similar transactions can be
27. spread x points multiplier e In percentage spread 100 x mid rate Example We shall examine the impact of each of these spread definition methods on the currency pair USD DEM Mid rate 1 6040 Spread 10 In points the buy rate and sell rate would be calculated as Buy rate Mid rate spread x points multiplier Sell rate Mid rate spread x points multiplier If points multiplier 0001 then Buy rate would be 1 6040 10 x 0001 Sell rate would be 1 6040 10 x 0001 In percentage the buy rate would be calculated as Buy rate Mid rate spread x points multiplier Sell rate Mid rate spread x points multiplier Buy rate would be 1 6040 10 100 x 1 6040 Sell rate would be 1 6040 10 100 x 1 6040 a ORACLE 11 3 1 The default spread definition is through the points method The method of spread definition that you specify here applies to two instances e While maintaining exchange rates for this currency pair e While maintaining Customer Spread for this currency pair Specifying Points Multiplier Points are the smallest unit of measurement in the exchange rate of a currency pair If you have opted for a points system of defining spread you should specify the multiplication factor for the points to compute effective spread Suppose for the currency pair USD DEM your rates are as follows Mid Rate 1 6045 Buy rate 1 6040 Sell rate 1 6051 The effective buy spread is 0 0005 1 6045 1 6040 an
28. the consolidated entry for clearing will be passed according to the following grouping e Remitter s Account e Clearing Product e Instrument Currency e Remitter s branch 1 ORACLE End point A consolidated clearing entry will be passed using a separate Transaction Code maintained in the Clearing Product Preferences screen This Transaction Code should be set with Cheque Mandatory option as No in the Transaction Code Maintenance screen One consolidated clearing entry will be passed for each of the above groups Entries will be passed against a common reference no generated for each of the groups After the consolidated entry has been passed each individual instrument will be processed separately to pass charge entries if applicable at the transaction level Specifying Turnover Limit Preferences You can specify turnover limits for an account class and thereby monitor the turnover in all accounts linked to the account class Turnover Limit Code Specify a turnover limit code that should be linked to the account class The adjoining option list displays all valid turnover limit codes maintained in the system using the Turnover Limit Maintenance screen You can choose the appropriate one 30 2 5 Specifying Liquidation Preferences for Debit Interest and Charges You must specify the liquidation preferences for debit interest and charges for those accounts classes where interest charge has to be debited from
29. 1 5 Placing User Restrictions on Data Entry Batches scccsccsseesseesseeseeeseeeeeesecesecesecusecaecaaeeaeeeaeeeaeees 2 8 2 1 6 Specifying UDF De Gils arcis aa EE R E aieeaseyy E E E eerie E E E 2 12 2AT Specifying Account Generation Parameters at Bank Level o on 2 12 2 1 8 Defining Bank wide Preference sssvesscesvcessdesusacseastusiseacesinesysetatenyeduatcnn overssdesiiiersauvisate tame sastuetyedteses 2 20 2 2 MAINTAINING BANK PARAMETERS FOR FC CORE Q c cscescesecssesecssesscseeescsseceeesecseesecsesesesaeseseseseueseenesenes 2 30 2 2 1 Address Date Details TAD nE EREET R OE E E NE E A ERER 2 31 22 2 GLDet ils TAD gai cheascgh sasuke a E e adeu EE E O peasceds AE a EE E EENES 2 33 2 23 Other Details TAD speia eea aneen e ts cdsevannedveceasnasesaueats obeaside ese svdeceoaseateetaanssadaastavesaageteesetas 2 36 3 DEALER MAINTENANCE ccsscssssssscssssessscnsscsecscsscsssnsssssnesscsscssesssssnssssenesscssessesssssessossnessssscssessessosees 2 1 3 1 DEFINING DEALER sneri r chostessesevitey EEEE EE E suey sabe cuanestentoviegecnap vad E E Eeh 2 1 4 BRANCH PARAMETERS iissssiscisososssisissssessesssssossesssssssosssssoseoueov assis ssrt tovs sse sov v osb s osvo s ssie ssns SooS s iess 4 1 4 1 CREATING BRANCHES sisi escateueinienswxevepsvecsedenveneusconesssbeeseeyvieanenbecuesenevesebethebeesnotsesseas NEEE KEER Eea ESNEA 4 1 4 1 1 System TCANLTOS oireen N E EEN E E E E SS 4 1 4 1 2 Creating Reporting SIUCTULE s so csu
30. 6 td 8 6 ld 8 9 10 611 12 Ho 12 13 14 AS 1 1 9 10 2 11 12 13 4 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ie 49 D al Se 16 17 18 19 2 2 22 2 2 22 23 24 235 2 2 2 7 2 2 30 23 24 2 2 WF 2 2 27 28 29 30 3 31 July August September 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 cd 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 114 12 13 1e 5 6 LA 8 9 i ti y M n M e 15 16 17 18 19 2 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 16 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 22 23 2 2 2 2 2 19 20 2 22 23 24 2 25 262 2 28 2 0 N 29 3 31 25 27 28 29 30 October Hovember December z Fields Date Tit 7 Modification Number 1 Date Ti In this screen you maintain a list of holidays of the Clearing House with which your bank is associated with 24 1 1 Steps to Define Clearing House Holidays To define Clearing House holidays for a year for instance for 2000 you have to do the following Building the calendar for the year Step 1 Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon Step 2 Enter the year 2000 or move to the year 2000 using the arrows ai ORACLE Step 3 To build the calendar for the year 2000 click the Refresh button This button is called the refresh build up button because it builds the calendar for you Please note e Your clearing house can be identified with the name SYS given to it by the Oracle FLEXCUBE system This is displayed in the field Clearing House e Saturdays and Sundays are marked as weekly holidays for the Clearing House This is the
31. Buy rate and Sale rate Specify the currency pair for which you want to compute the exchange rates The pair should be selected keeping in mind the quotation method for exchange rates as followed by the market The system offers the choice of maintaining both the currencies as currency1 or currency 2 USD against DEM and DEM against USD For the pair specified the following parameters need to be maintained to arrive at the buy and sell rate of currencies e Rate Type e Mid Rate e Buy Spread e Sell Spread le ORACLE e Buy Rate e Sell Rate Rate Type This is the rate type for which you are maintaining exchange rates for a currency pair For different transaction categories your bank would like to maintain different exchange rates For example traveler s check is purchased at a certain rate whereas a bill of exchange is bought at a different rate In the front end modules where you define products to cater to the various transaction types of your bank you can link an appropriate rate type to the product For instance you create a product to cater to outgoing cross currency transfers by SWIFT For this product if you define the rate type to be STANDARD then for all contracts linked to this product the Standard Rate Type would be applied Mid Rate Mid rate is an indicative exchange rate for a currency pair It is the average of the buy and sell rate quoted by the market for a currency pair Example Suppose currency 1 U
32. FT modules Product Code You must specify the product transactions involving which the limit amount will be applicable You can specify that the limits must be applicable for all products Currency 1 You need to specify the currency1 applicable for defining the Transaction Amount limit beyond which the system will not default the Auto Exchange Rate All valid currencies defined in the Currency Pair Maintenance will appear for selection This currency is always the transaction currency of the contract 1e ORACLE Currency2 You need to specify the currency2 applicable for defining the Transaction Amount limit beyond which the system will not default the Auto Exchange Rate All valid currencies defined in the Currency Pair Maintenance will appear for selection The Currency2 should be part of a Currency Pair Maintenance in which the Currency1 defined here is the first currency Currency 2 can be specified as ALL 12 1 4 1 Specifying Limit Details Rate Code You need to specify the Rate Type code for the Exchange Rate Limit Limit Currency You need to specify the currency in which the Limit Amount should be expressed All valid currencies defined in the system will be applicable for selection There will be a validation for the limit currency as either Currency1 or Currency2 Limit Amount You need to specify the maximum amount up to which the system should default the Exchange Rate or perform the Rate Variance validation
33. Line Limit Amount Available Amount Utilization 4 Jan 2001 Line1 60000 30000 30000 4 Jan 2001 Line2 40000 40000 0 5 Jan 2001 Line1 60000 15000 45000 5 Jan 2001 Line2 40000 34000 6000 Line Utilizations History History Date Reference No Line Amount Liability Utilization 4 January 2001 Acct Line1 10000 10000 4 January 2001 Loan1 Line1 20000 20000 5 January 2001 Loan2 Line1 15000 15000 5 January 2001 Loan3 Line2 6000 6000 This option can be enabled or disabled at any point of time Limits history will be recorded with effect from the day the option is enabled Disabling the option will however not automatically purge history data 2 25 You have the option of querying Liability history and drilling down to Limits Line history and further drilling down to Contract wise Utilization history Clean risk data is displayed only as of the date of query and history for the same is not maintained Branch wise Limits This option indicates whether or not the limits tracking must be done at the branch level If this box is checked you will be allowed to view change only the lines created from that branch for a given liability To illustrate if you open any credit line facility in branch BR1 then in the Limit Restriction screen the only branch available will be BR1 Checking this option will also allow you to View details of line utilization at the branc
34. Off Parameters ssoosseeeeeeseeenesrsreersereereerrsresrseerrsreereseerreseseresesreerreree 8 15 8 3 HANDEING EURO AE EA 8 16 8 4 MAINTAINING EURO RELATED INFORMATION ccccsscescsseessesecssesscsesescsseeesesecssesecsesseeseseecsseseuenecsesseeneees 8 16 6 4 1 Maintaining Currency Details pinar aa A E E E E 8 16 8 4 2 Maintaining Conversion GLS sisareni ai rE EE RE EAEE EA EEEE 8 19 8 4 3 Implications of Currency Redenomination ccccccceescescesecesecesecusecseesseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecnsecnaesnaeenes 8 20 8 4 4 Specifying Preferred ERI Currency for Counterparty essssesseseesereerserseeerrsrresrsresreerrrrerereresesreerreen 8 23 8 4 5 Specifying Settlement Message Details ccccscccscesseesseesseeeeeeeceescesecesecaecueceecaeeeaeeeaeeeeseeneeeeenaees 8 23 6 4 6 Settlements of Foreign Exchange Deals ccccsccessesseesseesseeeeeseceeecesecesecuaecuecaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeneeeeseeeeeaees 8 24 8 4 7 Reports Gnd Avice orpoa aer EEan A EAE AE EREE AEE E O EEP ENEE EENEN E 8 25 8 4 8 Maintaining Transaction Limits cccescceecceceseceenceceseceencecseceeaeecsueceeacecsceeeaeeceaeeeeneecseceseneeceeeeeeneees 8 25 8 5 MAINTAINING SEQUENCE GENERATION FORMAT ccccecessessscececessessneececececeesenaesesececeenssaesececeeeesennaeeeeees 8 27 9 MAINTAINING CURRENCY DENOMINATION ccsccsssssssscssscscsscssssesssenesscssecsesssssnsessssessssnessessssoeses 9 1 9 1 INTRODUCTION sisan chicsucsotesesnredecnn teaser velecdayvaved
35. Value Date Spread Branch Code ABC Description American Bank Main Branch Currency Code AUD Description Australian Dollar Value Date Spread EJ Input By BRIJ1 Date Time 7 3 2000 35 Modification Number 1 iv Open Authorized By BRIJ1 Date Time 0 E Authorized The Value Date Spread is maintained for a Branch Currency combination You can select a branch and currency code from the option list available The spread should be expressed in calendar days and is applicable only to outgoing funds transfers All outgoing funds transfers should be generated earlier than the cut off time maintained for the currency involved in the transfer This is applicable to transfers that originate from the FT Module of Oracle FLEXCUBE through settlements of any other transaction or transfers uploaded from an external source When the value date of a transfer is beyond the effective cut off time Cut off Time Branch Offset Time the branch value date spread specified for the currency involved in the transfer is added to the transfer value date In effect such transfers are generated as follows Generation Date Transfer Value Date Branch Value Date Spread The reference of time is always the System Time server Example You have maintained the following details e Branch Value Date Spread 2 Days e Cut off Time 8 PM e Branch Offset Time 3 hours e Effective cutoff time 11 PM Cutoff time Branch offset time You have effected
36. a continuous sequence irrespective of the combination that you specify in the mask Example Let us assume that you want the customer account number to be a combination of the customer number and the account currency followed by the serial number To achieve this you have to specify the mask as CCCCC SS Based on this mask for a customer with CIF ID 40207 with account in USD the account number will be 40207USD01 If the same customer has another account in GBP the next account number would be 40207GBP02 That is there will not be any holes in the system generated running number 2 1 7 2 Specifying Auto Account Creation Parameters You may wish the system to automatically create current accounts for customers at the time of loan initiation These system created current accounts are for use as settlement accounts Here you need to specify the range of numbers available for such auto created accounts by mentioning a start and an end number If you wish to retain the facility of auto creation of current accounts at loan initiation you will have to ensure that the account number mask does not have any user input character 2 19 2 1 8 Defining Bank wide Preferences In the Bank Wide Preferences screen you can specify the following e The route of inter branch accounting through HO through RO or directly between branches e Exchange rate preferences to be maintained for the bank as a whole or at each branch e Preference r
37. a transfer with Value Date 15 June 2000 at 11 30 PM In this case the value date of the transfer is later than the effective cut off time The Branch Value Date spread is applied to the transfer value date The transfer will be generated on 17 June 2000 4 32 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 How Uploaded FTs are handled In the case of outgoing transfers that are uploaded from a source external to Oracle FLEXCUBE the value date will be amended directly based on the cut off time maintained for the currency and value date spread maintained for the customer Maintaining Tax Cycle You can maintain tax cycle at the bank level through the Tax Cycle Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDTXCYL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Tax Cycle Maintenance Web Page Dialog F 21x E Tax Cycle TEST111 Description TEST111 Start Date 7 2014 End Date 7 3 2014 Input By BRIJ1 Date Time 7 21 23 48 Modification Number 1 open Authorized By BRIJ1 Date Time 7 21 23 48 E Authorized Tax Cycle You need to define the tax cycle which will be uniquely identified in the system Start and End dates for tax cycle You need to specify the start and end date of the tax cycle you are defining Updating Tax Cycle The Current Tax Cycle would be updated as and when the tax cycle changes This would be done during authorization of date change
38. account class While modifying the maintenance if you uncheck this box the daylight overdraft limit will be made zero for all the accounts belonging to this account class Debit Credit Advices If checked indicates that for all accounts belonging to this class the system will generate a debit credit advices on interest liquidation The advices are generated during end of day processing in SWIFT or and MAIL format You can also specify this preference through the Special Conditions screen Track Receivable if checked you can choose to block the subsequent credit that happens to the settlement account linked to this account class of a loan contract or retail teller contract if the system detects insufficient funds in the account during liquidation In other words the system will track the account for receivables credits As and when a credit happens the funds will be allocated to the loan or the retail teller contract for liquidation Posting Allowed if checked indicates that the account class being created is to be used while creating IRA monetary accounts Monetary accounts used for IRA need to be distinguished from the other accounts in Oracle FLEXCUBE so that these accounts do not come up for posting in the other Oracle FLEXCUBE screens 14 ORACLE e Referral Required enabling this option indicates whether a referral check should be performed on accounts belonging to the account class Consequently the system c
39. and the Position Entry Flag for the Control Account is set to Yes then the system will do position accounting for that entry Hence for the GLs set up as Control Accounts the Direct Posting flag in the Chart of Accounts maintenance must be turned OFF Additionally it is also recommended that these Control Account GL s that you have specified in the Bank Wide Parameters screen for the mismatch entries are not used as part of Role to Head Mapping in any of the products If maintained the system would pass mismatch adjustment entries into the same GLs in which the main entries have been passed There is no system enforced validation of this and this aspect needs to be taken care of during Product set up 2 3 2 1 3 Generating Automatic Balancing Entries In the case of transactions entered in any of the front end modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE the accounting process checks the entries at each business event and automatically generates the balancing entries in case of a mismatch in currency or value date entries or both Manually entered journal entries In the case of manually entered journal entries a journal batch that has been opened must be closed before it is authorized During closure the accounting process checks to see that the batch is balanced with respect to currency and value date entries If a mismatch is detected the accounting process raises an override to this effect Depending upon how the override is configured
40. at the time Oracle FLEXCUBE is installed at your bank Once maintained the amount descriptions printed on account statements and other messages will be described according to your specifications in this screen Language You can maintain verbal equivalents of numerals in any language that Oracle FLEXCUBE supports This means that you can maintain the verbal equivalents of numerals in as many languages as you generate messages i ORACLE Text You must describe the following numerals in the Description field in the language that you specify in the Language field e 1 2 3 upto 10 e 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 and 90 e 100 e 1 000 e 10 000 e 100 000 e 1 000 000 e 10 000 000 and so on In certain languages One thousand One million and so on are expressed simply as thousand and million If you are defining verbal equivalents of amounts in such a language do not choose the Prefix One option Statements and messages printed in such a language will describe amounts such as 1000 simply as thousand Choose the Prefix One option if you would like amounts such as 1000 described as One thousand Currencies In this screen you can also describe the pre decimal and the post decimal units of a currency in different languages Enter the verbal equivalent of the pre and post decimal units of a currency in the Pre Decimal and Post Decimal fields respectively For e
41. be allowed to trigger the batch process for splitting the unrealized profit and loss for the previous year and the current year only if you have specified this Track PY PnL Adjustment as a preferred option for your branch If you set this preference the data pertaining to the unrealized income is collected at contract level for the following modules Securities Unrealized Interest Discount and Premium accrued for the year Derivatives unrealized income Bills and Collections unrealized income Letters of Credit unrealized income 4 20 Money Markets unrealized income 4 2 4 3 Indicating Revaluation Split Details Revaluation Split Required You can choose to break up revaluation profit loss into Trading P amp L P amp L due to revaluation of foreign currency transactions during the day Revaluation P amp L P amp L due to revaluation of opening balances balances without current day s turnover If you enable this preference all GLs which are marked for revaluation split will have their revaluation profit loss broken up into trading and revaluation P amp L for entries posted from this branch 4 2 4 4 Specifying International Banking Account Number MASKS The IBAN or International Bank Account Number is a unique account number that is used to identify a customer s account in a financial institution internationally International Bank Account Numbers in your bank are generated in the format of the account
42. be involved in an inter branch transaction you can define the currency and the respective customer accounts to which the related accounting entries will be posted The accounting entries for such inter branch transactions can be routed in one of the following ways e Directly where each branch will have a direct accounting relationship with all other branches e Through a Regional Office where two branches involved in a transaction will interact through a common RO e Through the Head Office where the two branches involved in the inter branch transaction will interact only through the HO This route for all transactions is defined in the Bank parameters screen In the Inter branch Parameters Maintenance screen you define the internal accounts for pairs of branches that would be involved in any inter branch accounting Invoke this screen by typing ACDIBMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen appears as shown below Z Interbranch Parameters Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x 4 Branch1 CHO Description BANK OF INDIA Branch2 LCS Description LC AND BC BRANCH General Ledger General Ledger Accounts for LCS Accounts for CHO Due To Branch2 453501021 Due To Branch1 453501065 Description DUE FROM BRANCH 001 Description DUE FROM BRANCH RO2 Due From Branch2 433501065 Due From Branch 433501098 Description DUE FROM BRANC
43. can choose the appropriate one Refer the section Maintaining Event Class for Account Initial Funding in the chapter titled Creating Classes under Modularity User Manual for further details about the event class code 30 2 8 Maintaining Provisioning Details When you define an account class you can specify whether provisioning is applicable for accounts using the class You can make the following specifications in the Provisioning Details section in the Account Classes screen e Auto Provisioning Required Check this box if provisioning is applicable e Provision Frequency Frequency at which the provisioning would be done either daily or monthly the frequency you define here is only applicable if you have indicated individual account wise status processing for accounts in the Branch Parameters If you have indicated status processing at Group CIF level then the provisioning batch process executes at the frequency maintained in the Branch Parameters screen for your branch and not at the frequency maintained in the Account Classes screen e The currency in which the provisioning amount must be calculated either account currency or local currency e Default exposure category for accounts using the account class e Event class for which the provisioning accounting entries would be defined The specifications you make here are inherited by any account that uses the account class In addition to these pre
44. checked at the Account Class Maintenance screen You will be allowed to modify this value even after authorization a ORACLE 31 Anti Money Laundering Reporting 31 1 Guarding Against Money Laundering In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can guard against Money Laundering by using the anti money laundering option wherein you will be required to maintain certain basic information as a safeguard against Money Laundering activities that customers may indulge in 31 2 Monitoring AML Accounting For AML reporting purposes while maintaining a transaction code you need to indicate whether AML monitoring is required for all accounting entries linked to the transaction code You can invoke this screen by typing STDTRCOD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Transaction Code Maintenance Webpage Dialog Transaction Details Transaction Code Description Availiability Information Preferences Fields Input By Authorized By Immediate On Value Date After Days with New Value Date After X Days Cheque Mandatory Interest and Charges Transaction Count Interest and Charges Turnover Inclusion Consider for Account Activity Interest and Charges Balance Inclusion Consider For Turnover Limit Date Time Date Time MIS Head External Code Anti Money Laundering Monitoring Anti Money Laundering Required Product Category Statement Day Basi
45. choose the Auto Rollover and Close on Maturity options the Auto Rollover option takes precedence In other words choosing the Close on Maturity option and the Auto Rollover option is redundant Your specifications here will default to all deposit accounts opened under the account class However when maintaining a deposit account you can change the specifications that default Cluster ID Specify a valid cluster ID you need to link to deposit account class You can link cluster ID only for term deposits Tax Details Limit Specify tax details limit appropriate to deposit account class Tax Details Limit Currency Specify a valid currency for the specified tax details limit from the adjoining option list Mandatory Tax Details Field Select tax detail fields you need as mandatory fields from the adjoining drop down list This list displays the following values e Only Tax ID Select if you need only Tax ID as mandatory field e Only Tax Details 1 Select if you need only Tax Details 1 as mandatory field e Both Select if you need both as mandatory fields 30 2 22 1 Defining Specifications for Unclaimed Deposits On the maturity date of a deposit you can opt to e Liquidate the deposit e Rollover the deposit e Move it to an unclaimed GL Interest for the term deposits liquidated during the specified schedules is handled in two ways e f acustomer account has been specified interest is moved to the account d
46. countries As mentioned before the HF record comprises the holiday details for countries where EUR is not the local currency The currency code is obtained from the country code present in this record The holiday record is then uploaded into the Oracle FLEXCUBE holiday upload table The HF record has the following format Position Description Length Type Mandatory Data 1 Tag Identifier 2 VARCHARZ2 Y HF 3 Modification 1 VARCHARZ2 Y A addition Flag M modification D deletion U unchanged 4 Country 2 VARCHAR2 Y ISO Country Code Code 6 Country 35 VARCHAR2 Y Country Name Name first part 41 Country 35 VARCHAR2 N Country Name Name second part ea ORACLE Position Description Length Type Mandatory Data 76 Date 8 VARCHAR2 Y Date ofa Holiday k 84 Holiday type VARCHAR2 Code indicating type of Holiday see below 85 Special 320 holiday info VARCHAR2 Restrictions applicable if a holiday is not applicable country wide or is not a full day HS For European countries The HS record comprises the Target holiday details for countries where EUR is the local currency The holiday record is uploaded into the Oracle FLEXCUBE holiday upload table The HS record has the following format Position Description Length Type Manda
47. currency at the pre determined conversion rate on the fixing date two working days prior to deposit maturity At maturity you receive the principal and interest in either the deposit currency or the linked currency whichever is weaker The following details are captured here Linked Currency Specify the linked currency if the account class is to be used for creating TD with Dual Currency option Alternatively you can also choose the currency from the adjoining option list You will be allowed to capture this value here only if the option Dual CCY Deposit is checked at the Account Class Maintenance screen You will be allowed to modify this value even after authorization CCY Option Product Specify the currency option product from the option list under which the Options Contract has to be created in case of Dual Currency Deposit The option list displays all the Option Products with Product Type CO ORACLE You need to mandatorily choose CCY Option Product if the Linked Currency is entered You will be allowed to capture this value here only if the option Dual CCY Deposit is checked at the Account Class Maintenance screen You will be allowed to modify this value even after authorization Fixing Days Specify the number of days from TD maturity date before which the exchange rate has to be fixed You will be allowed to capture this value here only if the option Dual CCY Deposit is
48. different branches for the accounting roles defined in the system If you have maintained Role to Head mapping for a product at the branch level the system uses these accounting heads instead of the heads maintained at the product level You can maintain Role to Head mapping for a combination of branch product and status in Branch Level Role to Head Mapping screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDACRHM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 4 35 e Branch level Role To Head Mapping Webpage Dialog Branch Code Branch Name Product Code Product Description Status Role To Head Mapping Details Accounting Role Accounting Head Maker Date Time Mod No BB Authorized Cancel Cancel Checker Date Time I Open You can specify the following details in this screen Branch Code The branch code of the current branch gets defaulted here Branch Name The name of the current branch corresponding to the branch code gets displayed here Product Code Specify the product code for which you wish to maintain role to head mapping or select the product code from the option list provided Status Specify the status code for which you wish to maintain role to head mapping or select the status code from the option list provided Accounting Role Select the accounting role to be used for role to head mapping fr
49. displays messages in respect of errors that occur when you execute operations during a work session in any module These error messages are also displayed in respect of automatic or batch processes such as end of day processes Depending upon your requirements at your installation you might require some of the errors to be ignored and others to result in an override being sought from the user for the operation to proceed For still others you might require an online authorization for the operation to proceed Accordingly the implementers at your installation configure the sensitivity of such errors Subsequently you might also need to configure errors to suit your requirements 25 1 1 Types of Overrides In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can assign a level of sensitivity to each override that arises or occurs during system operation This level of sensitivity that you assign to an override indicates the action that will result when that specific override occurs Accordingly you can assign any of the following sensitivity levels to an override Ignore This would mean that no override message would be displayed and the exception would be ignored Override This sensitivity indicates that an override message should be displayed seeking confirmation from the user If the user confirms or accepts the override processing of the transaction would proceed if not the exception would have to be corrected before transaction processing can proceed Fo
50. e The duration for which spool files should be stored in the spool file directory e The directory into which the files should be spooled e MIS codes for posting of automatic balancing entries These details can be maintained by the respective branches For a branch you maintain the following in the Preferences screen Netting Suspense GL All settlement accounting entries relating to a netted FX contract is passed into the specified Netting suspense GL The net amount of the settlement is transferred through the Nostro accounts For instance let us take the following two outstanding contracts entered into by bank A both settling on January 10 1998 4 15 e Bought from bank B 1 Million USD in exchange for 35 Million INR e Sold to bank B 1 2 million USD in exchange for 18 million INR The above contracts can be settled in either of the two ways given below on the settlement date e Settle both contracts separately e Net the settlements of the two contracts If your bank has a netting agreement with the counterparty the settlement entries are posted to this Netting suspense GL and the net amounts are settled through the nostros Walk in Customer For your branch you can create a walk in customer ID against which you track all those customers who do not hold a regular account with your bank but have approached the bank for a transaction say for encashment of traveler s checks or for manager s checks Inte
51. each financial year which typically extends to 12 months from January to December or from March to April However this could be changed depending upon the Bank s policies and regulatory requirements For interim reporting needs the financial year is further divided into accounting periods the duration of which is again determined by the bank s accounting requirements For example your bank s Board of Directors meets once a month therefore you would divide the financial cycle into monthly periods The financial year and the accounting periods are referred to in the Oracle FLEXCUBE system as the Financial Cycle and the Financial Periods respectively and are maintained at the bank level by your Head Office branch At the end of each financial period and financial cycle you can generate profit and loss statement and a balance sheet The system also offers you the flexibility of keeping a financial period financial cycle open allowing you to post adjustments to it and obtain a revised profit or loss statement balance sheet You can maintain these details in the Period Code Maintenance screen 16 2 Invoking Period Code Maintenance Screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDACPER in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen appears as shown below 4 Period Code Maintenance Web Page Dialog 21x Cycle FY1 Description
52. for a particular currency is not maintained the discount rate of the specified discount currency will be picked up for discounting profits on forward foreign exchange contracts e Head Office The default currency for the Head Office e Reporting The default currency in which all financial reporting should be done 2 2 2 1 2 2 You will not have an option to modify the default currencies that you specify after the Bank Parameters record has been stored and authorized Auto Generate Currency and Value Date Mismatch Entries You can specify that balancing entries must be generated automatically by Oracle FLEXCUBE in the case of currency or value date mismatches in accounting entries due to transactions that are not balanced with respect to currency or value dates for each branch single entity of your bank To specify the automatic generation of such balancing entries for currency mismatches select the options Auto Generate Currency Mismatch Entries and for generation of balancing entries to correct value date mismatches select Auto Generate Value Date Mismatch Entries in the Bank Wide Parameters screen If indicated in the Bank Wide Parameters balancing entries will be automatically generated for any event if a mismatch of currency or value date entries or both is involved in any module of Oracle FLEXCUBE with the exception of manually entered journal entries Specifying Control Accounts for Auto Balancing Entries
53. for future dated transactions Hold for Asset Product Check this box if credit hold is required for asset type product for future dated transactions Limits Revaluation Frequency Last Revaluation Date Specify the last date of limit revaluation 2 40 Next Revaluation Date Specify the next date of revaluation of the bank Revaluation Base Specify the base of revaluation for the bank Select the appropriate options from the drop down list Next Revaluation Frequency Specify the frequency of revaluation for the bank Select the appropriate options from the drop down list IT Circle Address IT Circle Number Specify the income tax circle number where annual returns are filed City Specify the name of the city where the income tax circle is situated Address Specify the address of the income tax circle Zip Specify the ZIP code that forms a part of the income tax circle address Once you have captured the details save the maintenance 2 41 3 1 3 Dealer Maintenance Defining Dealer At the time of entering the details of a foreign exchange money market or securities deal you will be required to enter details of the dealer who has struck the deal The dealers at your bank who are associated with the buying and selling of foreign exchange money or securities in the treasury should each be assigned an identification number ID number The dealer list is maintained for the bank through the Deale
54. function on the first day of the new Tax Cycle Account Statement Handoff The account statement handoff will consider the movements on accounts based on the Statement Date and not the Transaction Date The Statement Status Change will itself run the Account Statement handoff for the previous working date before marking the Branch Statement Status as ready 4 33 4 4 3 Account Statement Generation Accounting entries with Statement Date lying between From Date and To Date populated in the handoff records will be picked up for Account Statement Generation processing Example The table shows the list of transactions for a customer for statement processing on 01 08 2003 Booking date Value date Transaction Clearing Appear on Number Transaction statement 31 07 2003 30 07 2003 C1 N Y 31 07 2003 31 07 2003 C2 N Y 31 07 2003 01 07 2003 C3 N Y 31 07 2003 30 07 2003 C4 Y Y 01 08 2003 31 07 2003 C5 N N 01 08 2003 31 07 2003 C6 Y Y As illustrated Clearing Transactions have a special treatment as compared to other transactions To achieve the above set up the following set up is expected For Inward Clearing transactions the Transaction Code will be maintained with the Statement Date Basis as previous working day This means that the Clearing Transactions uploaded on 01 08 2003 will have the Statement Date as previous working day of 01 08 2003 i e 31 07 2003 For transactions
55. in a transaction do not report to a common regional office the accounting entry would be routed through the HO e f you specify Direct each branch would have a direct accounting relationship with every other branch The receivable and payable accounts between the branches referred to as due from and due to accounts are maintained in the Inter branch parameters screen Example Suppose the University Savings Bank has the following set up for its head office and branches in Headington Oxford e Roosevelt Avenue Branch is the HO with Branch Code 000 e Foxlake Drive Branch Branch Code 001 e Mountainwood Road branch Branch Code 002 You have indicated that inter branch transactions should be routed through the Head Office Ms Tanya Agnihotri has an account in Branch 002 She makes a cash withdrawal from Branch 001 This being an inter branch transaction Branch 001 will have to recover the money from Branch 002 In this example the following movement of funds is involved e At Branch 001 the cash account is credited for the transaction amount and due from Head Office account debited e At Branch 000 the due from Branch 002 is debited and the due to Branch 001 is credited e At Branch 002 the Customer Account is debited and the due to Head Office account credited Inter Branch Entity Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to post accounting entries related to inter branch transactions to either of the followi
56. individual contract account level or at a Group CIF level If you opt for Group CIF level processing it is done in two stages e The worst status among all contracts and accounts under a specific customer group or CIF is arrived at e All accounts and contracts involving the customer group or CIF are then moved to the worst status that was arrived at If you opt for status processing at individual contract account level the status of each contract or account would be assigned according to the status processing parameters that are operative for the contract or account Provisioning Frequency Provision processing depends upon status processing for accounts and contracts The provisioning batch process executes after the status processing batch If status processing is indicated to be processed at group CIF level you can indicate the frequency at which the provisioning batch is to be executed for your branch The frequency options available are daily and monthly Withdrawable Uncollected Funds Basis You can define how the System enforces the allowable amount of uncollected funds on an account that can be withdrawn within a business day For each customer account you designate a limit on the amount of uncollected funds that can be withdrawn the Uncollected Funds Limit You can also indicate whether for a given business day the System should consider the uncollected funds that are allowed to be withdrawn as e The fu
57. is the account branch Account Number This is the account number Ccy This is the currency of the transaction Dr Cr This is the nature of the transaction either debit or credit Trn Code This is the transaction code while posting the journal entry Description This is the transaction description Status Status of the transaction Value Date This is the value date of the transaction Account This is the description of the account Description Event This is the event triggered on the transaction Fey Amount This is the transaction amount in a foreign currency Exch Rate This is the exchange rate used if the transaction is in any other currency Lcy Amount This is the transaction amount in local currency Auth ID This is the user ID of the user who authorized the transaction Total Debits This is the total amount debited under the product Total Credits This is the total amount credited under the product 32 3 Accounting Journal This report gives details of every journal entry transaction You can invoke this screen by typing ACRJRNAL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button ORACLE 32 4 LBL_DELTRANS Module Transactions Single All All This Branch Posted to Other Branch This Branch acted as Bridge Products Print Copies Single Position Entries All Report Date Single All
58. loan repayments by customers who have their current or settlement accounts in some other bank of the clearing network you can initiate Direct Debits to these accounts When a payment is due on a loan a direct debit is generated Loan DD Generation Days before the payment date As a result in Oracle FLEXCUBE the following entries will be passed Dr Clearing suspense Cr Dummy Settlement Account During liquidation which is performed on the schedule date the entries passed are as follows Dr Dummy Settlement Account Cr Loan Asset GL Interest Income GL Floating Rate Proceed Without Maintaining Floating Rate Check this option to indicate that floating rates should be propagated across all branches Sector code Specify the Sector Code of your branch as specified in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen Routing No On the basis of the Routing Number Mask defined for your bank and your specifications in this screen for clearing and sector Oracle FLEXCUBE automatically generates the Routing Number for clearing transactions involving your branch in the Routing Number field Deferred Statement Status This is a display field This field indicates whether or not the Branch is ready for Deferred Statement Generation Y indicates the Branch is ready for deferred statement generation Install Select the appropriate value from the drop down list to indicate whether Oracle FLE
59. number of days before which a customer of the account class should notify the bank if he she wants to withdraw an amount more than the Free Amount from his her account Validity Period Specify the notice validity period in number of days During this period a customer of the account class can do the withdrawal of the amount for which he she notified the bank Pa ORACLE 30 2 22 To handle time deposits in Oracle FLEXCUBE you have to set up an account class of type Account Classes for Time Deposit Accounts Deposit in the Account Class Maintenance screen Identify the account class you are setting up with a unique code and a brief description To handle time deposits choose the Deposit option under Account Type Typically for every deposit scheme you offer at your bank you would set up a Deposit Type Account Class Click the Deposits button to define the parameters for a deposit type account class The Details Specific to Deposit Type of Accounts will be displayed z e DECIS Specific to Deposit Type of Accounts Webpage Dialog Auto Rollover Close On Maturity Allow Partial Liquidation Allow partial Liquidation with amount block Move Interest to Unclaimed Move Principal to Unclaimed Rate Chart Allowed Minimum Tenor Recurring Deposits Recurring Deposit Move Maturity to Unclaimed Move Funds on overrid
60. of codes that you can use to represent different types of transactions Chapter 18 Account Revaluation Maintenance explains the maintenance of parameters for account revaluation Chapter 19 Maintaining Branch Holidays explains the maintenance of the holiday calendar for the different branches of your bank Chapter 20 Maintaining Currency Holidays explains the maintenance of the holiday calendar for the different currencies in which your bank transacts Chapter 21 Maintaining Clearing Holidays explains the maintenance of the holiday calendar for the different clearinghouses with which your bank transacts Chapter 22 Configuring Overrides details on configuring overrides of the system 1 2 ORACLE Chapter 23 Purging Data explains the details of purging data Chapter 24 Annexure B File Formats contains a list of file formats Chapter 25 Anti Money Laundering Reporting explains the process of guarding against money laundering a facility provided by Oracle FLEXCUBE Chapter 26 Reports explains the procedure of generating Reports Conventions Used in this Manual Important information is preceded with the symbol 1 1 3 Related Documents e The Settlements User Manual 1 1 4 Glossary of Icons This User Manual may refer to all or some of the following icons fe az Option List N ORACLE 2 1 2 Bank Parameters Defining Bank Level Parameters In the Bank Wide
61. or documentation shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs No other rights are granted to the U S Government This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications that may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate failsafe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure its safe use Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing This so
62. record the background disappears 23 2 2 Defining Currency Holidays To define any other weekly holiday for the currency other than the default double click the day of the week listed on the top row of the screen For instance if you double click F all Fridays in the year would be marked as holidays To clear off the default weekly holidays Saturdays and Sundays double click on sa and s written on the top row To specify other holidays double click on that date the date would be marked as a holiday If you want to unmark a day specified earlier as a holiday double click on it once again You will notice that the day gets marked in black Because the change is yet unauthorised it appears against a blue background one ORACLE 23 3 Uploading Holiday file SWIFT provides a country wise holiday file that can be uploaded into Oracle FLEXCUBE For all countries where EUR is not the local currency the respective holidays can be uploaded into the currency holidays tables For European countries where EUR is the currency you can upload the TARGET holidays Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to upload these currency holidays through the BIC BICPLUS Upload screen You can invoke this screen by typing ISDBICPU in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z BIC Upload Web Page Dialog E 21 xl 4 Source Code zj File Name
63. s date post authorization the system computes and updates the Current financial cycle and the Current period in the Branch Parameters screen 5 1 1 Maintaining Dates Change For maintaining date change invoke the System dates maintenance screen after EOD for the day is run Click Unlock in the Action menu or click unlock icon The system populates the default dates in the screen For instance on the first working date i e 2nd of January 1998 the system dates will be updated to Today s date 02 Jan 1998 Previous working date 01 Jan 1998 Next working date 03 Jan 1998 Today s date is defaulted from Next working date of the old record Previous working date is defaulted from today s date of the old record The Next working date is picked up from the Local branch holiday calendar as maintained by you You can modify today s date and the next working date by either clicking unlock icon on the toolbar selecting unlock from the action menu Previous working date cannot be modified Today s date if modified should always be greater than the previous working date and less than the next working date Similarly next working date if modified should be greater than today s date On modifying the dates the system will ask you for an override On confirmation the change will be effected Date change should be immediat
64. settled in EUR or in an In currency In the settlement messages that are generated MT 100 MT202 the settlement amount would be reported in the Settlement Account Currency However you can opt to additionally furnish the value of the component in Euro Related Information ERI currency You have to manually specify the settlement amount value in the ERI currency in the Settlement Message Details screen When generating the message towards settlement MT100 MT202 the system ensures that the value you specify as the ERI Amount conforms to the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI Currency in the Currency Definition screen That is the system computes the ERI equivalent of the settling amount using the pegged rates and compares the same against the ERI amount input by the user If the difference is within the tolerance limits defined for the ERI currency the user specified amount is used If the user specified ERI amount breaches the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI currency the system calculates and reports the ERI Amount on the basis of the exchange rate defined for the settlement currency vis a vis the ERI currency aa ORACLE Example In the SWIFT messages MT 100 and MT 202 that are generated towards settlement the value of the component can be reported both in Nostro account currency in Field 32A and in an ERI currency that you specify in Field 72 In Oracle FLEXCUBE this information is captured in the European Relat
65. that are not Inward Clearing the Transaction Code will be maintained with the Statement Date Basis as Current Working Day This means transactions that are not Inward Clearing and processed on 01 08 2003 will have the Statement Date as 01 08 2003 So when the Statement Generation processing is done on 01 08 2003 for a statement till 31 07 2003 the Inward Clearing Transactions generated will be included and not the other transactions The following table will show the result of the processing with the Statement Date Booking Value Transaction Clearing Branch Statement Appear Date Date Number Transaction Statement Date on Status statement 31 07 03 30 07 03 C1 N Y 31 07 03 Y 4 34 4 5 Booking Value Transaction Clearing Branch Statement Appear Date Date Number Transaction Statement Date on Status statement 31 07 03 31 07 03 C2 N Y 31 07 03 Y 31 07 03 01 07 03 C3 N Y 31 07 03 Y 31 07 03 30 07 03 C4 Y Y 31 07 03 Y 01 08 03 31 07 03 C5 N N 01 08 03 N 01 08 03 31 07 03 C6 Y N 31 07 03 Y 01 08 03 31 07 03 C5 N Y 01 08 03 N 01 08 03 31 07 03 C6 Y Y 01 08 03 N Thus the Statement Date derived will drive the transactions picked up for the statement between a given date if the Statement is a Booking Dated Statement Maintaining Role to Head Mapping at Branch Level You can maintain different General Ledgers for
66. the Customer Number Product Category and Currency combination 31 2 ORACLE 32 Reports 32 1 Introduction You can generate the following reports List of deleted transactions Accounting journal Cash flow report Balances of future dated transactions Current Rates Report Account Opening Confirmation Account Closing Confirmation Activity Journal Report Core Exception Report 32 2List of Deleted Transactions This report lists out the deleted transaction details pertaining to each product under each module pertaining to every user You can invoke this screen by typing ACRDLTXN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button T Deleted Transactions Listing Web Page Dialog Products Transactions Oa OAR Tres Branch Posted To Other Branch Tris branch acted as bridge C Price Copies 32 1 ORACLE Specify the following details Module Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single module or for all modules If you choose Single you need to specify the module for which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid module codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Transactions Indicate the type of transactions that should be covered in the report The following options are available e All e This branch e Posted to Other Branch
67. the account class But you are allowed to change these restrictions for individual accounts as well To maintain the restrictions click the Restriction button in the Account Classes screen The Product and Transaction Codes Restriction screen is displayed 3 Products and Transaction Codes Restriction Web Page Dialog x Account Class TIMDP6 Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Products and Transcation Codes F 3 m Product Code Debit Credit Product Description z Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Products and Transcetion Codes F m Transaction Code Txn Description Debit Credit a The restrictions can be based on e Products e Transaction Codes Validation of Restrictions During maintenance or online operations in the respective contract screens for the restricted transactions when you specify the customer account the system checks whether the account class used by the specified account is restricted for the product that has been selected or the debit credit transaction type If so an override is sought when such contracts are saved ad ORACLE 30 2 15 Maintaining Details of Account Statements Generation To receive the details of account balances you need to capture the relevant information in the MT 941 MT942 message The account balance details can be linked to the message by employing the statement screen To invoke this screen click on the Statement button in
68. the account class maintenance screen You need to specify the details for an MT 941 MT942 message Interim and Balance Report Web Page Dialog x Bi Interim Transactions Report T Generate Message TIMES IT Generate Message only on Movemer Report Transactions Since z of X Minimum Debit Amounts 25 minimum credit Amounts P 0 Currency Amount Bj D Currency Amount z fa z Balance Report I Generate Balance TIMES Report Transactions Since 7 of X This screen contains the details necessary for the account generation parameters The message details the balance of an account or group of accounts under a particular account class The account balances indicate the condition of the account for an identified time period 30 2 15 1 Specifying Interim Transactions Report Specify the following Generate Message Check this box to indicate that the accounts belonging to the account class are to be considered for periodic interim statement generation i e MT942 Generate Message Only On Movement Check this box to indicate that the interim statement needs to be generated only if additional entries have been posted subsequent to the previous interim statement generation oe ORACLE Report Transaction Since This is a list of all the transactions the accounts under a class have undergone on basis of which the transactions would be reported in the interim account statement You can choose the appropriat
69. the check box positioned next to this field Frozen If you have frozen a customer account in the Customer Information Maintenance Basic screen the accounts gets frozen For instance at the behest of a court order the status of the account is reflected here in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen Posting Allowed System by default checks or unchecks this check box based on the value maintained at Account Class level This check box facilitates Inter branch Accounting through Entity Accounts instead of GLs The accounts maintained for these Inter Branch transactions are used only for posting system generated Inter Branch entries and not for any direct posting using Journal Entry or Teller Transaction screens ae ORACLE Amounts and Dates Account Open Date You have to capture the date on which the account was opened Alternate Account Number You have to define an alternate account number for the account you are defining The alternate account number that you specify should be unique for each customer You can capture the old account numbers used by your bank before installing the Oracle FLEXCUBE system The old account numbers would be mapped with the new account numbers This would facilitate quick tracking of the account and generating queries In the Data Entry Module you can input a transaction using the alternate account number instead of the actual account number IBAN Account Number To captur
70. the number range is maintained at the branch level you can specify different number ranges for different branches of your bank To maintain the number range click the CIF Range in the Branch Parameters screen The Customer Number Range screen is displayed Branch Parameters CIF Range Start Customer Number End Customer Number Start Dummy Customer Number End Dummy Customer Number Specify the following in this screen Start Customer No This number is the basis on which the system generates the CIF numbers for customers of your branch The CIF number generation is determined by the following details e The CIF mask maintained in the Bank Wide Parameters screen Assume that the mask is pbbnnnnnn where bbb represents a 3 digit branch code and nnnnnn is a 6 digit number e The start customer no assume that this number is 100 While generating CIF numbers the system will automatically assign the number 000000100 to the first customer of your branch assuming that the branch code is 000 This conforms to the CIF mask maintained for the bank The next customer will be 000000101 and so on 4 26 If the option Auto Generate CIF Numbers is checked in the Bank Parameter Preferences screen and the start CIF is zero or null the new customer number will be generated for the branch as per the current running sequence number of the Head Office End Customer No Just as yo
71. to market In all foreign currency accounts the FCY current balance is displayed along with the LCY equivalent of the current balance The LCY equivalent current balance is the aggregate of the LCY equivalent of the various transactions that have been posted to the account In the Chart of Accounts GL Details screen you specify whether a GL should be revalued or not In the Account Revaluation Maintenance screen you specify parameters for account revaluation such as rate type the GL to which the profit or loss from revaluation should be posted etc You can invoke this screen by typing RVDSETUP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button a Account Revaluation Setup Web Page Dialog i 2x General Ledger Code AS 20 Description CASH IN HAND FCY Transaction Code 140 Description WB MISC CREDIT Rate Type TC Description TRAVELLERS CHEQUE Profit General Ledger Description Loss General Ledger Description Revalue into Description Trading Profit Account Description Trading Loss Account Description JT Netting of Offset Entries Entry Based Revaluation Rate Type Transaction Code Input By SANGEE date 3 2000 15 36 33 Modification Number 1 Iv Open Authorized By SANGEETH ate 3 3 I Authorized In this screen you can maintain the following parameters to define the revaluation parameters for a GL account e The general ledger accoun
72. transactions input in the branch The dates screen is maintained at the branch level by the respective branches Invoke this screen by typing STDDATES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z System Dates Maintenance Web Page Dialog E 2 x El Branch Code 001 American Bank NY Branch Todays Date 7 Previous Working Date 6 Next Working Date Input By RAJESHK Date Tin 2 28 1999 15 42 22 Modification Number 2 fv Open Authorized By RAMREDDY Date Time 12 31 1999 15 42 50 E Authorized In this screen the following fields are maintained for your branch You define today s date previous working date and next working date for the first time during installation of the system for details refer to the installation manual Suppose Oracle FLEXCUBE is installed on 1 January 1998 in your bank In the dates screen you would input the following Today s date 01 JAN 1998 Previous working date 31 DEC 1997 Next working date 02 JAN 1998 After EOD for a branch is run the system will not allow you to run any other operation in the branch till a date change has been invoked 5 1 If you try to run any other application you will be prompted to invoke a date change first e Simultaneously two different branches can be running on two different system dates This may happen when EOD for a branch is delayed for some reason e Based on today
73. you could define a rate type called CASH which will be applicable for all cash transactions in foreign currency TRAV CHKS for traveler s checks buying and selling and so on The buying and selling rates for each rate type are defined in the rate definition screen In the front end modules where you define products to cater to the various transaction types of your bank you can link an appropriate rate type to the product For instance you create a product to cater to outgoing cross currency transfer by SWIFT For this product if you define the rate type to be STANDARD then for all contracts linked to this product the Standard Rate Type would be effective The currency Rate Type Definition screen is maintained at the Bank level by your Head office branch You can invoke this screen by typing CYDCRTYP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Currency Rate Type Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x z Currency Rate Type Type CASH Description CASH Zi Fields p Modification Number 1 open EA Authorized In this screen you can maintain the following Type Currency types in which your bank may be dealing with like cash travelers check telegraphic transfer etc Description Specify a description of the rate type ea ORACLE 15 Maintaining Floating Rates 15 1 Floating Rates A Floating Rate corresponds to the market rates for the day
74. 12 1 4 2 Validating Exchange Rate Limits The Funds Transfer Contract Input will default the Rate only if the Transaction Amount is less than the Maximum Amount defined for the Rate Code maintained at the product level for FT If the amount is more than the specified amount then the system will not default the Rate Instead it will force the user to enter the Rate Once the user enters the Rate the system will not add the Customer Spread etc as this will be final Exchange Rate for the contract The Rate Variance validation will also be done only if the amount is less than the maximum amount defined for the Rate Code maintained at the product level for FT If the amount is more than the specified amount the system will not perform the Rate Variance validation Instead there will be an override to specify that the transaction amount is greater than the maximum amount for Rate Variance check For details about how limits are applied when a transaction is entered refer the chapter Processing a Funds Transfer in the Funds Transfer user manual s ORACLE 13 Maintaining Currency Spread for Customer 13 1 Maintaining Customer Spread Details For a customer and currency pair you can maintain tenor wise spread details in the Customer Spread Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CYDCUSPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Customer C
75. ACLE 32 5 1 Contents of Report Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the module covered in the report and reporting options Body of the report The report is sorted by currency pairs The following details are displayed 32 6 Rate History Report This report gives details on history of rates for currency pairs You can invoke the screen by typing CYRTHIST in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Currency Rate History Report Options Web Page Dialog Report For All Currency Pairs Selected Currency Pair Selected Pair Currency USD Eee Currency2 INR Date Range From Date 9 1 2008 To Date 94 2008 Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the module covered in the report reporting options currency pair from date and to date Body of the report The report is sorted by currency pairs The following details are displayed Currency This gives the currency pairs for which rate report has been generated Pair Quotation This indicates the quotation type either direct or indirect No of Units This indicates the number of units of one currency bei
76. AEE E 27 2 272 3 AULHOTIZING a RECOM 052i sssnsccsascencisnsvonsapsseaieip etvessindivens iansenvaneiscessuesnceonheaiseandeaeeessseveeesceseiventinaiennesse 27 2 27260 Deleting ROCONE reer anena ae R EE EEEE ENEE E ETE AEE 27 2 27 2 7 Viewing Summary Of RecordS ssseesseseseeeesreereresrererserreerrreresesteresserreeseseeetereeeteseeresrretenereeesesereeeet 27 2 27 2 8 Modifying Tanking Preferences seresrsetcrseniceiu seisne nri aserte nr iene ae E 27 3 28 ANNEXURE B FILE FORMATS eseeessesossesesesoeeosoeseseseeceroroeoeseseeosroroesesesoeeosoroeseseeeesesosoeseeeeosrosorseseeeee 28 1 RA INIRODU TION cecair ka E E ENN EERE 28 1 26 2 UPLOAD FILE FORMATS recio i ia REEE rac EERE EE T AER E EER 28 1 29 NOSTRO ACCOUNTS MAINTENANCES esessseseesoeseseeesoesoroesesesoeossosoeseeeeceoeroroesecesoeeeroeoeseeeeoseororseeseese 29 1 30 ACCOUNT CLASS MAINTENANCE cccssscsssscsscssssscsssscssssssscessssssssssssessssnsesessesessssssesssssessessessossessoes 5 BOL INTRODUCTION sessesccsccsesieateiesetacatesteacusedsdacuiesteacesesesicedesteseusedtdieusecteacesvded ieudeste geese des seusecteseuseses seusentdgeuvesedeusese 5 30 2 MAINTAINING ACCOUNT CLASSES lt cscscescosceccacesescsscsiesceseesestsscesectsseetests scuieetsseusestsieetests seuseses ien i en AAR EE 5 30 2 1 Specifying Account Statement Parameters oossoseesseseeeseeeseiesrsrreresrrsresereresrsreesssrenreserrreseerreresreetset ll 30 2 2 Maintaining Cheque Book Preference ossonsseseeeee
77. BO01 BNKCUFINRA2 Account CCY Dr Cr FCY LCY Txn Code Val Date BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 DEM Dr 100 000 33333 33 ECV 17 BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 DEM Dr 20 000 6666 67 ECV 18 BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 DEM Dr 40 000 13333 33 ECV 19 CNV GL DEM Cr 80 000 26666 67 ECV 17 The following are the entries passed on the 18 of the month Account CCY Dr Cr FCY LCY Txn Code Val Date BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 EURO Cr 48000 40000 ECV 18 BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 EURO Dr 16000 13333 33 ECV 19 CNV GL EURO Dr 32000 26666 67 ECV 18 Change in field values due to conversion The change in currency re denomination impacts amount based fields pertaining to Accounts Collaterals Credit Lines and Customer Limits The change in the value of these fields is reflected when you run the beginning of day processes The amount based fields which are affected by the change in currency denomination will be updated with the equivalent value in the new currency Accounts The following fields will reflect the new values e Temporary Over Draft limit e Sub limit e Uncollected Funds limit e Offline limit e Account Currency These fields can be found in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen 8 21 ORACLE Collateral In the Limits Maintenance Collaterals screen the following fields will be updated e Collateral Currency e C
78. Branch Code Enter its name aa Name Parent Branch PE HO Code defaulted click to disolav all codes maintained select a Reaional Branch asl HO Code defaulted click to display all codes maintained select a 4 2 4 2 Basic Parameters for Branch In Oracle FLEXCUBE the Head Office and the Regional Offices are defined as branches You can maintain the details of the Head Office regional offices and branches in the Branch Parameters Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDBRNCH in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button FCCORE Branch Parameters Maintenance Branch Code Branch Name JBranch Available Status EISEN Financial Details Additional Details Parent Branch Description Time Zone Offset Regional office Description Hours Country Code Description Minutes Customer Identity Description Wlanead Local Currency Description Time Level Alternate Branch Code Fund Branch EOC Status External Value ATM Details CutOff Offset Time Local Payments ATM Branch Hours Clearing Branch Institution Identification Minutes Inter Branch Transaction Code ustomer Transfer Address BIC Branch Address Line 1 Telex Branch Address Line 2 Host Name Branch Address Line 3 TAN No TAX UTN No SWIFT Address Account Mask CIF Range GI Functions Branch Currency Mak
79. Branch Holiday Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x tay Branch Code CHO Branch Name BANK OF INDIA Holiday Working Type HOLIDAY WORKING Holiday Date From 6 26 2000 Holiday Date To 6 26 2000 Holiday Reason SYSTEM Type Exceptions E Holiday Working Date Reversed Flag z TM 57 26 2000 Fields Input By AMIT Date Time 7 2 Modification Number 1 Iv Open Authorized By IFLEXSUTH Date Time 7 5 fv Authorized man ORACLE In this screen for the current branch you can maintain a range of dates every date within which will be designated as holidays for the branch You can also provide a reason for the designation Every unexpected holiday you designate must be authorized for it to be effective 22 2 4 1 Reversing Designated Holiday In the Unexpected Holiday Maintenance screen you can also reverse a designated holiday before the actual date Specify the holiday date in the Holiday Date field and check the Reverse box field alongside it When you designate unexpected holidays any bank or customer value dates for any transactions that coincided with the holiday are rolled forward Any accounting entries passed are reversed and fresh entries are passed to reflect the new value date For the release of uncollected funds the original transaction date is considered for availability calculations DER ORACLE 23 Maintaining Currency Holidays 23 1 Introduction You need to maintain a yearly lis
80. CYCIFNUMBERn D This corresponds to LLLLL CCCCCCCND All customer accounts entered in any branch of your bank would now comprise of these elements in the order defined in the mask A customer with CIF number 10005 has opened his first USD savings account with your bank and the Account class for savings accounts is INDSB His account number would read INDSB USD 10005 01 D Similarly the second GBP current account of a corporate customer with CIF Number 20005 would read CUCOR GBP 20005 02 D CUCOR being the account class representing current accounts of corporate customers Customer Account Number Containing a UDF Value While defining a customer account if you include U in the account mask it indicates that the customer account numbers will have the value of a user defined field The number of U s will depend on the length of the UDF value that has to be included in the customer account number For example if you want to include 3 characters from a UDF the account mask should consist of UUU in addition to other parameters which you want to include in the customer account numbers Note the following e A user defined field can be part of the customer account mask only if the customer account number generation is not automatic e Since a customer account number in Oracle FLEXCUBE can accommodate only up to 20 characters you have to ensure that the account mask you have defined does not exceed this n
81. Certificate Frequency and the Tax Certificate Day It could be any of the following e Monthly This indicates that the tax certificate would be generated every month The day of the month on which the Tax Certificate would be generated is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field e Quarterly Q This indicates that the tax certificate is generated once in three months The end month for the first quarter is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field The Certificate would be generated on the last working day of the month defined in the Tax Certificate Day field Subsequent end months would be derived by the system e Half Yearly H This indicates that the Tax Certificate would be generated once in six months The end month for the first half year period is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field The Certificate would be generated on the last working day of the month defined in the Tax Certificate day field Subsequent end months would be derived by the system e Yearly Y This indicates that the tax certificate would be generated once a year The month in which the certificate needs to be generated is defined in the Tax Certificate Day field The Certificate would be generated on the last working day of the month defined in the Tax Certificate Day field Frequency Value Specify the frequency value 4 30 4 2 11 Maintaining Clearing Currencies You can maintain a list of currencies in which clearing transactions can be proces
82. Class TIMDPS Description Term Deposits A c Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Available Branches kaL T available Branches Restriction Type Allowed Disallowed Available Currencies F T Available Currencies Currency Preference In this screen you can specify the following for an account class e Those branches to which all parameters defined for this account class should be available e Those currencies in which all customer accounts linked to this account class can operate Pe ORACLE 30 2 18 Maintaining Branch Preferences Customer accounts maintained in any branch can be linked to any account class However you have the option of restricting the linkage of customer accounts in a particular branch or branches to an account class Example Your bank has a total of 25 branches Branch 001 and 004 handles only Corporate Customers For an account class say SAV IND savings accounts of individuals you would like to disallow linkage of all customer accounts of branch 001 and 004 To specify this click on disallowed since the disallowed branch list is smaller than the allowed branch list From the list of Available Branches select 001 and click the adjoining arrow Repeat the procedure for 004 001 and 004 will be listed under disallowed branches For specifying the allowed list of branches first click on allowed You will notice that the list title changes accordingly to allowed and v
83. Core Services Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking Release 11 6 0 0 0 October 2015 ORACLE FINANCIAL SERVICES ORACLE Core Services Table of Contents 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL ju ccecccscscscccescnssscsssscsssssesesssnessssnessessssessessnsssssnessssnessesssssesssssnessssnessessessoseness 1 1 1 1 INTRODUCTION sss se 2ucsees sireeni sir oe oesie Eeee Era ENEO Or vie AEE Ce aE AEE Erea SE EEE EEES EEEE IESS 1 1 1 1 1 Auden e onena E NE E A E E E A E REN l 1 1 1 2 OP BQ ONIZGUON eristeen izenssspeseessssningntdunteededsixsopsazasancesseloepsianivaiensiseeysereaneseieesoaps benieededeiaeoveapactesciaees l 1 1 1 3 Related DOCUMENUS 5 0 ckscccaceiisvesesdcagunsessbeens e Ee na EE E Ee e RE EEEE EEA E ERE 1 3 1 1 4 Glossary of ICONS sscicteiiesasviidics casa a E E T E E E E E EARS 1 3 2 BANK PARAMETERS csccsssssssscsssssssscsssscssssnssscsssssesesssnsssssnsssssncesesssesssssssnessssscesosssssossssssessessossossessosees 2 1 2 1 DEFINING BANK LEVEL PARAMETERG cssscssscssssscsscssessvsesssscecosscessncensvnsnssonsusscesonecsussnsnassussssonsonsossoasenes 2 1 2 1 2 Maintaining Financial Preferences cccccscccsssecessceensecessceescecuccessceceeeesacecaceeeaeecaeeesacecuaeeeeaeeenaeeesaes 2 2 2 1 3 Generating Automatic Balancing Entries cccccccccecceeceseceseceecusecusecaeeesseesseseeeseeeseceneceaeceaeensecnaeenss 2 4 2 1 4 Maintaining General Preferences ornnes ine ae E tonaeteed say eite iss auavedeinuaes teayins EE 2 5 2
84. Days If you enable the Back Value Check Required option you must indicate the number of calendar days up to which back valued transactions can be allowed During transaction processing you will be allowed to post back valued transactions up to the specified date in the past no check will be done Further if the option is checked but you have not maintained the Back Value Days maintained as NULL the system will interpret it to be Zero days allowed for back valued transactions The restriction for the maximum period up to which back valued posting can be allowed will be made on transactions processed in following modules Payment and collections Data Entry Retail Teller Utility Payments Foreign Exchange Money Market Expense Processing Fund Transfer Loans and Deposits While saving transactions pertaining to any of these modules the System validates the Value Date of the contract to check whether it adheres to the restriction You will be intimated with an override if the Value Date is earlier than the specified period This restriction is made applicable on all uploads as well Refer the Contract Processing chapter of the individual modules for additional information 4 2 4 2 Indicating Profit and Loss Adjustment Track Previous Year Profit and Loss Adjustment You can collect data pertaining to the unrealized income booked for each contract during the year by triggering the Year end batch process But you will
85. E EEEa Ia 20 1 20 2 INVOKING TIERED PRODUCT SPREAD MAINTENANCE SCREEN sssessssscececeesensececececsessaesesececeesenseaeseeess 20 1 21 ACCOUNT REVALUATION MAINTENANCE ccccssssscsssseccsssssecssssccscssseccscnssecsssnscecesscsecesssceesees 21 1 Zl INTRODUCTION 35 Sdien cee weeks eae ha excuse Haovadiein he evden ee aoe wee adobe sintedest ensue shee 21 1 22 MAINTAINING BRANCH HOLIDAYS u ccsssscccssssccessscccessscccccssccecsssscccessscccscssceesessacccesssceceessseeeees 22 1 221 INTRODUCTION vis ccavesiceetecrseevecetexectacosnsvetetacesaaeasubcevecsasstueneoussce ret toewsnsisth Ce vast vouleuansiadednehchucbonses Sobuunieieoraette 22 1 22 2 INVOKING LOCAL HOLIDAY SCREEN ss scscssceesesssseeecececsesseaeceeececseseaesecececeeseaaesececessessaasaeseeseeesenseaeeeeess 22 1 22 2 1 Steps to Define Yearly Holidays cccecceecceeeeessesscesscesecnsecncecaeecaeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeceaecaecsaecaecaaeesaeenaees 22 2 222 2 Defining Holidays sessioner niii a eE spades sonvenseansesbaancgshabudeavedssaseoeteoseemedooiogies se 22 2 2223 ANNUGLOMAGYS deser e En E E EE E EE E E E E TE 22 3 22 2 4 Designating Unexpected Holidays for Branch ssseseseseseseeseeeeerreresrsrresesreserrrsreserrresrsrreresene 22 3 23 MAINTAINING CURRENCY HOLIDAYS csccisscssscssesoosossnssessssocsssessoossssssccsssessessessescosssessestenscssssesessess 23 1 23 1 INTRODUCTION PAE AEAT vs su ves dbs andaeceasuvavesdavegevbe su veedhuavvgevoasevgs
86. EES KE A R TEAN RE 6 2 6 1 2 Specifying Customer ACCOUNIS s siisicsscvsovesscveetenteassne itessevetbevasevouevenvecbetbivedseubescevataesessenbivedvervenesuerters 6 4 6 2 VIEWING OUTSTANDING AMOUNT DETAILS cccccssssscessesesseeesesecesesecseseeesseseseaecouesecsesseeseseesesesssesssoeeeeenes 6 7 7 TRANSACTION RELATED MAINTENANCES 0 0 0 cccssssssssssscsssscescsssecssssncssessesessessnsssssnessssnessessssosees 7 1 7 1 INTRODUCTION PAE E E A R E E E 7 1 7 2 MAINTAINING TRANSACTION CODES FOR FC CORE s seeesesssssesrsreessrssesenrerrsssnesenreriersrneesestnrenrnennesenete 7 1 7 3 MAINTAINING TRANSACTION RATE CROSS REFERENCES 0ccccscssssssessessesseessesesesesecseseeseeessesecsuesscneeenenes 7 4 8 CURRENCY MAINTENANCE ccsssscsssssscssscccscssescsssnsssssnssscsneesesssssssssssnsssssseesesssssessssssessesnessossessosees 8 1 8 1 INTRODUCTION esis ccocsesevscssessesscasececssesscsscgucscecssesd ossgeucswcoutebestassdee E 8 1 8 2 MAINTAINING CURRENCY DETAILS wie iscsesiscss ccscens cetosesscsscenes occstesecoscntdscossesececueds sdscsdsevseuvesiesocsuseceteusbies teey 8 1 6 2 2 Specifying Exchange Rate Limits ccccccceccsseesseeseeeseesseesecesecesecaecuaecaaecaaeeaaeeseesseeseeeseeseeseaeenaeeaenae 8 9 8 2 3 Mapping Currency 10 COUNTY 3 s ssesssasazeds an aai E aE E aE a E E 8 10 8 2 4 Specifying Us r Defined Field cerminan an ae E EE E N 8 10 8 2 5 PAV CHUTE E E E E E E E T E ae S 8 11 8 2 6 Specifying Currency Cut
87. File Path Intraday Sequence Number Submit Param Submit Batch Here you need to choose the source code as CCH from the drop down list For further details about this screen refer the section titled Uploading the BIC BICPLUS files into Oracle FLEXCUBE in the Settlements User Manual The holiday file gets uploaded with two records e HF Record wherein EUR is not the local currency e HS Record wherein EUR is the local currency For more details on the file formats of these records refer the chapter titled Annexure B File Formats e ORACLE 24 Maintaining Clearing Holidays 24 1 Introduction You need to maintain a yearly list of holidays of your Clearing House This is defined in the Clearing House Holiday Calendar screen This set of holidays is maintained at the bank level by the Head Office You can invoke this screen by typing STDCLHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Clearing House Holiday Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x f M T Y Th F a M T W Th F i M N Th January February March 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 10 2 11 12 13 7 8 g 10 11 12 13 0 4 612 61306 14 1516 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 17 48 129 DW 2 z A 2 23 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 3a 7 2 25 2 2 28 29 30 28 28 29 30 N 31 April May June 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 6 td 8 9 10 2 3 4 5
88. H RO2 Description DUE FROM BRANCH PC1 Inter Branch Currency Account Currency Y Inter Branch Currency Account Currency MIS Group MIS Group Due to Branch 2 Due to Branch 1 Description Description Due from Branch 2 Due from Branch 1 Description Description f Fields Input By ARY6 Date Tim 010 0 Modification Number 1 Authorized By f Date Tim In this screen you maintain the following for each combination of branches that may be involved in an inter branch transaction e Branch Code of both the branches that are involved in the transaction e For each of the branches whether inter branch entries must be posted in transaction currency or settlement account currency e Customer accounts of Branch 1 gt Due to Branch 2 gt Due from Branch 2 e Customer accounts of Branch 2 gt Due to Branch 1 gt Due from Branch1 6 1 1 System Features The system generates a set of pairs of branches for which internal accounts should be maintained The pairs generated depend upon on two factors e The reporting structure for the branches as created in the Branch parameters screen and e The route defined for inter branch transactions in the Bank wide parameters Preferences screen 6 2 Example Suppose the following represents the reporting structure of your bank HO BR BR2 If you have defined a direct inter branch accounting route then you need to maintain an accounting relationship for each possible combina
89. HQ Process Date IBAN MASK LN Process Date ELCs Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details 2 30 Bank Code In Oracle FLEXCUBE a bank is identified by a unique bank code You can follow your own convention in devising this code In all inter bank transactions this code identifies your bank Bank Name Specify the detailed name of the bank This name will be displayed whenever the bank code is used Bank Short Name Specify a short name that identifies the bank Bank Identifier Specify the bank identifier code This will form a part of the IBAN of the bank ISO Code Specify the ISO code This ISO country code will form a part of IBAN of the bank Clearing Bank Code Specify the clearing bank code assigned to the bank by the central bank of the country 2 2 1 Address Date Details Tab You can capture the bank address and details of processing dates in the Address Date Details tab FCCORE Bank Parameters Maintenance Bank Code Bank Name E GL Details Other Details Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 City State Zip Country IBAN MASK Maker Checker Specify the following details Bank Short Name Bank Identifer Last Process Date Next Processing Date STL Process Date TD Process Date Process Date GL Process Date CHQ Process Date LN Process Date
90. Head office You can indicate your preference If you check against the option Copy to Branches the exchange rates maintained at the Head Office will be made applicable to all branches of the bank Leave it unchecked to indicate that exchange rates should be maintained at each branch Position Accounting Required You can retrieve the position of a foreign currency any time by opting for position accounting in your bank When you opt for position accounting you maintain a Position GL and a Position Equivalent GL for every foreign currency maintained in your bank The Position GL reflects the current position of the currency If you opt for position accounting while defining Bank Wide Parameters you have to maintain Position GLs and Position Equivalent GLs for every foreign currency that your bank deals in When maintaining GLs for your bank you can opt to link the different currencies associated with the GL to either of the following e The Position GLs that you have specified for the currency Your specifications in the Currency Definition screen will default here e Position GLs of your choice Daily MIS Refinancing As part of setting up the bank level preferences you can indicate whether MIS refinancing processing is required on a daily basis for the particular branch of your bank If you indicate that MIS refinancing should be done on a daily basis refinance processing will be done on a daily basis for the following modules
91. Maintaining Customer Preferences Instead of linking each customer account to an account class a customer category is linked to the class For an account class you should specify the category that should be linked to it and also specify if all customers under each of the categories are to be linked to the account class In the Account Class Customer List screen you have the option of specifying the categories that should be linked to this account class and within a category you can also restrict individual customers to be linked to the class To indicate allowed customer categories click the Customer Categories button The Account Class Customer List screen will be invoked ORACLE 3 Account Class Customer List Web Page Dialog xj EJ Account Class TIMDP6 Description Term Deposits A c Selection Indicator Allowed Disallowed Customer Categories I available Categories customers zj I customer No Allowed In this screen you define the following e A list of allowed or disallowed customer categories e A list of disallowed customers if any under the allowed category For an account class you need to specify the customer categories that should be linked to it and also customers within a category who should not be allowed to be linked to this account class 5 ORACLE Example Requirement You are capturing the features of a Nostro account class called NostroLCY y
92. Multi offset Entry 3 Teller Transaction Input 2 9 SSO Enabled To enable Single Sign On SSO for your installation check the SSO Enabled check box This enables restricted login from external systems into Oracle FLEXCUBE General Ledger Purge Days You can specify here the maximum number of working days the average GL balance computation for which is to be retained in the System 2 1 5 1 Specifying Cheque Numbering Details Scheme In Oracle FLEXCUBE cheque numbers can be generated automatically or can be manually entered If you indicate manually you can draw up numbering conventions and assign numbers to the cheques that are issued Checksum Algorithm If you choose the automatic generation option you can indicate the algorithm based on which the cheque digit should be generated A cheque number consists of three components e A check digit e A cheque type e A running serial number Check Number Type You have the option to choose the algorithm to be used to arrive at the check digit Currently Oracle FLEXCUBE supports only the Modulo 7 algorithm Based on this algorithm the check type and serial number is divided by seven and the remainder is taken to be the check digit If the remainder is zero then the check digit is set to seven The cheque type indicates whether the cheque is a Euro or Commercial cheque The numeral 1 before a cheque serial indicates a Euro cheque and 2 indicates a Commercial cheque The ch
93. Parameters screen you maintain basic information about your bank such as its name head office account number structure local currency and so on The details that you maintain in this screen will be made applicable to all branches of your bank For instance the account number structure that you define in this screen will be a common format for customer accounts in all branches of your bank Invoke the Bank Parameters screen by typing STDBANKP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button T Bank Parameters Maintenance Webpage Dialog External Bank Code External Bank Code Financial Preferences General Preferences Bank Default Currency Codes Local Discount Head_Office Reporting Control Accounts For Real Entries Control Accounts for Contingent Entries rency Mismatch Contro Currency Mismatch C Value Date Mismatch uto Generate Currency Mismatch Entries Auto Generate Value Date Mismatch Entries Fields Account Mask Preferences input By Date Time Modification number BB open Authorized By Date Time Bh Authorized You can maintain the following details in this screen Bank Code In Oracle FLEXCUBE a bank is identified by a unique four character code You can follow your own convention in devising this code In all inter bank transactions this code identifies your bank 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 Name You can also specify
94. Penalty Inclusion Inter Branch in Local Currency Acumen Transaction Code Exempt Advance Interest a Authorized a Open In this screen you maintain the following for a transaction 18 1 ORACLE e A code representing the transaction type e Description of the transaction type e The interval after which funds should be made available after the transaction e Preferences regarding charges to be levied or not on number of transaction counts and total turnover amounts e Preference stating whether a transactions booked under this code should cause an account marked as dormant by the system to be re instated to active e Preference whether payment for a transactions posted under this code should be made through cheque 18 2 1 Maintaining Transaction Details The following parameters need to be maintained for a transaction type Transaction Code This is the code you assign to a transaction type This code identifies the type of transaction Enter 3 characters Alphanumeric For example for all transfer charges transaction you can give the code as TCT for incoming telex transfer you can input ITT In case you want to assign numeric codes only then for ease of operation similar transaction types should be grouped into a range For example you can set a range for all Money Market transactions say A1 A30 a different range for Bills and Collections B1 B30 and so on Description This is the description of the t
95. SD Currency 2 DEM Buy rate 1 USD 1 7020 DEM Sell rate 1 USD 1 7040 DEM Mid Rate 1 7030 This is applicable if the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is not checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level If the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level Mid rate is displayed by the system Mid rate is an indicative exchange rate for a currency pair It is the average of the buy and sell rate quoted by the market for a currency pair Example Suppose currency 1 USD Currency 2 DEM Buy rate 1 USD 1 7020 DEM Sell rate 1 USD 1 7040 DEM Mid Rate 1 7030 i ORACLE Buy Spread This is the buy spread for a currency pair It can be defined as the profit margin specified over the mid rate when you buy currency 1 for currency2 You can define the buy spread in two ways either in points or in percentage The system computes the effective buy spread for you This is applicable if the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is not checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level If the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level Buy Spread is displayed by the system This is the buy spread for a currency pair Buy spread is the
96. Start Date 1MM End Date 12 31 1998 Period Group T Period Code Start Date 4 Ten 11998 Fields Modification Number 1 open I Authorized I ORACLE In this screen you define the following e The financial cycle of your bank giving the start date and end date of each financial year e The period group financial periods into which each financial cycle is to be divided The following are the features of the Period Code screen Financial Cycle For each financial cycle you maintain the following parameters Cycle This is a code for the financial cycle It acts as an identifier for the cycle For example while posting adjustments into a previous financial cycle you would identify the year through this code Input the code using a maximum of 9 characters alphanumeric Example The financial cycle extends from 1st April to 31st March in India A bank here could define its code for the year 1996 97 as FY 1996 97 Description This describes the financial cycle Enter description using a maximum of 35 characters alphanumeric Taking the above example you could enter Financial Year 1996 97 Start Date This is the first day of this Financial Cycle End Date This is the last day of this Financial Cycle Period Group The financial cycle defined above can be divided into different accounting periods To define individual accounting periods click on the first row under period code A period called FIN
97. The GL entries for tax 2 deducted at source TDS for CASA will be recorded in this GL This is a liability type GL Bank Cash GL Specify the code for the bank cash GL The GL entries for the buy and sell transactions between the vault of the branch and the central bank will be recorded in this GL Branch Vault Cash GL Specify the code for the branch vault cash GL The GL entries for the debit and credit transactions for a customer in a branch will be recorded in this GL Cash Shortage GL Specify the code for the cash shortage GL The debit entries for the reconciliation of shortage of cash physically held by the teller will be recorded in this GL This is a asset type GL Cash Overage GL Specify the code for the branch cash overage GL The credit entries for the reconciliation of excess cash physically held by the teller will be recorded in this GL This is a liability type GL 2 35 2 2 3 FX Profit Loss GL Specify the code for FX profit loss GL This GL account signifies the income GL which is credited for the profit entries to be captured as part of FX transactions FX Profit Sundry GL Specify the code for FX profit sundry GL This GL account signifies the sundry GL which is debited for the profit entries to be captured as part of FX transactions Tax Receivable GL 1 Specify the GL code for the tax receivable GL 1 This GL is used to debit for tax refund on the backdated debit interest adjustment This GL is an a
98. XCUBE installation is complete or incomplete 4 2 3 Capturing Additional Details In the Additional tab you can capture additional parameters including details of external branch Click Additional tab on Branch Parameters Maintenance screen FCCORE Branch Parameters Maintenance Branch Code Branch Name Branch Available Status General Details Financial Details naEEana External Branch Code CC Level Branch Type Higher Level CC Branch Short Name Computing Center City Clearing Sector Code State IBCC Level Zip Higher Level IBCC Phone Number Last Batch Update 0 SDB Branch Type Elpepartment FLEXCUBE Branch Epp Payable At Par Finternet Banking a m m m SWIFT Address Account Mask CIF Range GI Functions EL ig Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details External Branch Code Specify the external branch code that you need to map Branch Type Specify the branch type Type indicates the type of activities carried out by the branch You can select the appropriate type from the option list Branch Short Name Specify a brief name that identifies the branch City Specify the name of the city where the branch is situated State Specify the name of the State where the branch is situated Zip Specify the zip code that forms a part of the branch a
99. You can find the following details in the body of the report Module The module for which the report is being generated Contract Ref No The reference number of the contract being reported Counter Party The name of the counter party Counter Party Name The name of the counter party involved Date The branch date Event Description The description of the event Exception The description about the exception 32 15 ORACLE 32 10 Revaluation Report This report gives details of the memo revaluation funds You can invoke this screen by typing ACRREVAL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Account Revaluation Report Web Page Dialog Memo Normal Memo or Normal Specify the type of account revaluation report 32 10 1 Contents of Report Header The Header carries the title of the Report information on the branch code the branch date the user ID the module name the date and time at which the report was generated and the page number of the report Body of the report The details of the uncollected funds that would be displayed in the report are as follows This is the currency for which transaction details is being reported Currency Revaluation Rate This is the revaluation rate Account This is the account for which transaction details is being reported Description This is the description provided A
100. a Receivable GL before actually debiting the customer account This feature is applicable only for the debit interest and any charges on the account calculated through the IC module The preferences that you need to specify are Liquidate Using Receivable Indicates whether receivable tracking is required for IC Debit interest and IC charges Debit Notice enabling this option indicates that a notification needs to be sent to customers before debiting the customer account for the interest charge calculated for the period Liquidation Days specifies the number of working days from the actual liquidation date before the interest charge can be liquidated into the customer account Working days are calculated on the basis of the Local Holiday Calendar Liquidation Mode debit interest or charges can be liquidated either Manually or Automatically If you choose the automatic mode of liquidation debit interest or charges are liquidated automatically as part of the BOD process on the liquidation date However after having specified Auto as the mode of liquidation if you wish to liquidate them manually for a specific account the System intimates you with an override message Manual interest liquidation can be triggered through the Debit Interest Liquidation screen Manual liquidation is recommended during Account Closure H ORACLE Verify Funds enabling this option indicates that an available balance check should be performed fo
101. account code that forms a part of the customer account number Start Date Specify the date from which the account class should become active using the adjoining calendar You will be able to create accounts under this account class from this date End Date You can also specify the life span of the account class by indicating the end date The end date for an account class refers to the termination date after which creation of new account under the account class is disallowed Consequently the option list for Account Class in all further transactions screen in Oracle FLEXCUBE will not display the expired account class as of the system date However the existing accounts for the account class will be active even after the end date If you do not specify an End Date for the account class the account is taken to be an open ended account class Dormancy Days You have to indicate the period after which an account in an account class becomes inactive or dormant if customer transactions are not posted into the account i ORACLE However while maintaining transaction codes if you have checked the Consider for Account Activity field all transactions posted to any account under this account class linked to the particular transaction code will become active from dormant irrespective of the dormancy period If a customer initiated transaction is posted into the account with the dormant status the account status will be updat
102. ails screen Index Base Ccy Specify the currency that should be used to handle index based securities traded by the banks wherein the deals are done in index currency and their settlement is done through the local currency Generate 103 You can enable the MT 103 format option only if you would like to generate outgoing MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format If you are enabling this option for a specific currency ensure to also enable this option e For your bank branch in the Branch Parameters Maintenance e For the customer of the contract in the BIC Code Maintenance e For the product used by the contract in the Product Preferences i ORACLE 8 2 1 1 Consequently while processing transactions in the specified currency for such a customer branch and product for which the MT 103 option is enabled the system generates outgoing payment messages in the MT 103 format Since the system is also capable of processing incoming MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format Therefore during the upload process for your branch the system considers an MT 103 payment message to be of MT 103 format for those customer currency and product combinations for which the MT 103 option has been enabled CLS currency To allow customers of your bank to settle their FX deals via the CLS Continuous Linked Settlements Bank you can identify the currency to be a CLS Currency FX deals in the CLS currency only will be eligible to be
103. alance is 5000 The savings account balance is 5675 The system creates the deposit account as part of intraday batch DEDEPBAT in multiples of 50 which comes to 650 and it retains the balance amount of 25 in the savings account Def Rate Code Select the code of the differential rate whether Mid or Standard Def Rate Type Select the type of differential rate code whether Mid or Buy or Sell Sweep Mode Select the mode of sweep from the following options e Automatic For the deposit to be created as part of the batch e Manual For the deposit to be created manually Break Method Select the method in which the break of auto deposit should happen from the following options e MAXB The system breaks the maximum valued deposit account or the deposit account having the maximum balance in order of descending amount e MINB The system breaks the deposit account having minimum balance in order of ascending amount e FIFO The system breaks the deposit account in order of chronological account creation date a ORACLE e LIFO The system breaks the deposit account in order of reverse chronological account creation date the latest created deposit account breaks first Provide Interest On Broken Deposit Check this box to indicate the system to calculate interest on the deposits This is done when the attached account class is mapped to the IC product Break Deposits First Check this bo
104. an alternate reporting line other than the three level HO RO Branch structure The Parent for all the branches you create is the HO code default To specify the Parent other than the HO select from the options displayed The name of the parent branch is displayed alongside Regional Office This is the branch code of the Head Office or Regional Office to which the branch whose code is input eg Branch Code reports For a Head Office or a Regional office this code should be the Head Office branch code which is also the default for this field For the branches specify that branch as the RO to which the branch reports Select from the list of options displayed Country Code Specify the code of the country in which the branch operates Select from the options provided in the option list Customer Identity Specify the customer s identity ATM Details Specify the following details ATM Branch Specify the ATM branch Institution Identification Your bank may have a branch or multiple branches for different countries You have to capture the identification code that uniquely identifies your bank branch in the ATM transactions interchange environment Specify a code to identify the institution This institution ID will help identify whether a particular transaction has been sent from an external network or whether it has originated from your bank branch Inter Branch Transaction Code You can specify the Transaction Code t
105. anumeric this type of an account mask is a combination of alphabets and numbers where you can build the mask with components such as the Branch Code the Account Class the Currency Code a check digit etc e Numeric is a numeric type of account mask where the checksum algorithm associated with the account mask is either Modulo 11 Modulo 11 with weights or Modulo 97 e Pure Numeric is a numeric type of account mask which does not have a checksum algorithm associated with it If you are maintaining a pure numeric mask you have to identify the start and end account number which is to be associated with it Alphanumeric customer account masks The alphanumeric customer account mask can have a maximum of twenty alphanumeric characters It can comprise of one or more of the following elements in combination e Account Class Use ACLASS to indicate that the account class to which the account belongs should be part of the mask 2 13 e CIF Number You can incorporate the nine character CIF code assigned to the customer into the mask To do so indicate CIF Number in the mask e Currency To add the currency of the customer account use CCY e To indicate an alphabet or number Each element used to define the mask would represent a single character To represent an alphabet of the English language indicate a To represent a number indicate n e Punctuation Marks When defining the custome
106. applicable to an account class An account will be said to be in a specific status if any one of the five conditions associated with the status holds true for an account Conversely if all the conditions are false the account will automatically move to the next available status for which the condition is true The following elements are available based on which you can build a condition for automatic status change You can associate each of these elements with an account in the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen The set of elements are as follows e Frozen e Dormant e Nodebits e Nocredits e Stoppayment e Current Status In addition the following elements will also be available for processing e OD overdraft Days e Inactive Days a ORACLE e Overline Days e TOD Temporary Overdraft Days e Customer Classification Logical Operators Logical Operators are indicators of certain conditions that you specify while building a rule These operators are used in combination with the elements discussed earlier The following is a list of logical operators that you would require to build a status rule AND The conjunction and OR The conjunction or gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to please note that there is no space between the two symbols lt Less than lt Less than or equal to please note that there is no space between the two symbols lt gt Not equa
107. arameters 1 Assigning a unique Code to the Account Class and associating an appropriate description with the class 2 Indicating the type of account for which account class is being maintained 3 Specifying the period after which accounts in this class should become dormant if no customer transaction is posted into the account 4 Indicating the date from when new accounts can be created under the account class 5 Indicating the end date after which the new accounts cannot be created for the account class 6 Maintaining the different statuses applicable to the accounts for which the account class is being defined This would be used for tracking NPA s on current and savings accounts 7 Maintaining status wise GLs for provisioning 8 Identifying the reporting lines GL Line Central Bank Lines and the Head Office Lines for each status 9 Maintaining account statement details like the type of statement that is to be generated the frequency at which statements should be generated for all accounts under a class G ORACLE 10 Indicating the preferences unique to an account class like the check book passbook or ATM facilities to be given to account holders under this account class whether overdraft facility should be allowed for accounts linked to this class whether the credit limit should be checked for all accounts under the class interest and charges to be computed for accounts under this class 11 Specifying prefer
108. are as follows e Cash if this option is selected transaction will be carried out through the exchange of cash e Cheque if this option is selected transaction will be carried out via cheque e Transfer if this option is selected transaction will be carried out by account to account transfer Base Rate to Use Select the base rate that will be applicable for the transaction from the drop down list The options are as follows e Book Rate e Central Bank Rate e Mid Rate e Special Rate 1 e Special Rate 2 Spread to use Compute LCY Equivalent Select the spread to be used to calculate the local currency equivalent from the drop down list The options are as follows e Buy Spread e Sell Spread e No Spread Spread to use Compute Target CCY Equivalent Select the spread to be used to calculate the target currency equivalent from the drop down list The options are as follows e Buy Spread e Sell Spread e No Spread Once you have captured the details save the maintenance 7 6 8 1 8 2 8 Currency Maintenance Introduction In the Currency Definition screen you define the attributes of the currencies in which your bank can deal For each currency you can define attributes like the SWIFT code for the currency the country to which the currency belongs the interest method the spot days the settlement days etc Currencies can be maintained only at the Head Office The list of currencies will b
109. arity 8 2 5 Annexure The treatment for interest calculation varies with each of the interest calculation methods Each method is dealt with individually below Actual Actual Method 10 000x10 100 x 31 365 84 366 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 31 days include from date exclude to date Jan 31 days Feb 29 days leap year ou ORACLE March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 31 814 29 24 84 115 when the interest period crosses from a non leap year to a leap year or otherwise the basis of actual days has to be treated separately in each year Therefore the denominator for the 31 days in December is 365 as it is a non leap year and the denominator for the 84 days in 2000 is 366 as it is a leap year Actual 365 Method 10 000x10 100x1 15 365 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 31 days include from date exclude to date Jan 31 days Feb 29 days leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 314 314 29 24 115 Actual 360 Method 10 000x10 100x1 15 360 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 31 days include from date exclude to date Jan 31 days Feb 29 days leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 314 314 29 24 115 30 Euro Actual Method 10 000x10 100 x 30 365 84 366 que ORACLE In this method the number of days is calculate
110. articular day and are made before a specific cut off day are collated netted and a single payment message is sent instead of individual messages for each payment This cut off day can be parameterized and is called Netting Days The number of FX netting days applicable for the specified currency is maintained here The system will validate that the FX Netting days are lesser than or equal to the spot days Settlement Days In this screen you can specify the Settlement Days for a currency Settlement messages for the components of a contract in the LC BC LD MM FX and FT modules will be generated according to the settlement days specified for the currency of the settlement account The following example illustrates this aa ORACLE Example When maintaining the details of USD in the Currency screen you specify the Settlement Days as 2 This implies that two working days prior to the settlement of a component through a USD account a settlement message will be automatically generated if specified when you run the Settlement Messages function at the end of day The settlement details of a contract are as follows Settlement Date 06 May 1999 Settlement Account Currency USD Component Principal Settlement Message Yes Component Currency GBP When you generate the Settlement Messages function at the end of day on 04 May 1999 a settlement message for the Principal component of the contract will be ge
111. as in miscellaneous debit account in the miscellaneous credit accounts you post each transaction with a reference number In a miscellaneous credit account a single credit entry is matched subsequently with debit entries with the same reference number The system gives you a break up of the balance by reference numbers e Savings Account e Current Account Line Account This is used for creating accounts for charging limit fees Upon save of the account class with type as line account there will be an override specifying that the reporting GL s for the accounts should be contingent GLs There will not be any accounting entries passed into the accounts of line account type This will only be used as the calculation account for calculating the limit fees Hence the account balance of this account will always remain as 0 To ensure the line account functionality you will have to maintain the following In the Customer Account Maintenance screen you will have to create new customer accounts with Account Class type as Line Account and ensure the following parameters for every new line associated with a liability e The CIF of the account in the Customer Account Maintenance screen will have to be the same as the liability to which the line will be linked in the Limits screen e The currency of the account in the Customer Account Maintenance screen will have to be the same as the currency of the line that will be attach
112. ates that you have maintained the messages in the messaging system of Oracle FLEXCUBE the User Data Elements that you used to compute interest interest statement details user information maintained in the Security Management System of Oracle FLEXCUBE customer information and so on The system will automatically purge data according to the parameters that you define in the Purge Details Maintenance screen 26 2 Maintaining Purge Details In the Purge Details Maintenance screen you can define the parameters for purging data from the system For instance you may want to purge the contracts entered into in the previous financial cycle Or you may want to retain exchange rates in the system for a specific period These are examples of parameters that you can define in the Purge Details Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDPURGE in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Purge Details Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 xi Module Selection Module Identification BC La Description Bills and Collections Purge Criteria Status Liquidated Retention Period 245 Fields Input By BRIJ1 Date Time 2 Modification Number 1 fv Open Authorized By BRIJ1 date Time 0 2 Ud Authorized 26 2 1 1 Specifying Module In the Purge Details Maintenance screen you must first specify the module for which you are defining parameters A
113. ation you can indicate whether the authorizer must also confirm the override by checking the Confirm box You can make changes to configurable overrides in the Error Codes Maintenance screen only after consulting the support team at your installation Bi ORACLE 26 Purging Data 26 1 Introduction Purging is a process by which you remove unwanted data from the system For example you may find the interest rates that you have maintained for a financial cycle useless a couple of years later You would want to remove such data from the system You can achieve this by purging the system of the data The purge function of Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to purge e Contracts and transactions that you have entered into e Data relating to transactions such as interest rates e Limits history Liability Lines and Line Utilization history e GL Average Balance and Customer Account statistics You can purge the contracts or transactions that you have entered into in the following modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE e Foreign Exchange e Money Market e Loans e Deposits e Data Entry e Standing Instructions e Letters of Credit e Bills and Collections You can purge data from the following modules e Accounting e Currency e General Ledger e Interest and Charges e Messaging e MIS e Reconciliation e Receivable Liquidation ae ORACLE You can also purge data relating to transactions For example you can purge the currency r
114. atus Details screen Click the GL Lines button in the Account Classes screen to invoke it Status Details Web Page Dialog E xj Account Class TIMDT4 Description Term Deposits A c Status NORM J7 Rebook Provisioning on Status Change Description NORMAL STATUS Debit Reporting Lines Credit Reporting Lines 29021 Credit LI2902016 HOLI3500 HOLI3500 Sane De FEE I account Role Accounting Role Description Account Head Accounting Head Description 5 You can specify the following details in this screen Status You can select the different status codes applicable to the account class in this field Use the Add icon to define each status and the attributes for the same You can use the navigation icons to move from one status to the other Only status codes with status type Account will be available in the option list if the Status Processing Basis is defined as Contract Account for all branches in the Branch Parameters If the Status Processing Basis is defined as Group CIF level for any branch then the statuses of type Both are available In this case it is mandatory to link all the statuses defined a ORACLE On selection of the status the associated description will be displayed alongside 30 2 10 Specifying Reporting line Details Specify the following Dr and Cr GL Lines Select the debit GL account to which all debit balances within a specific account clas
115. b Click GL Details tab to enter the details FCCORE Bank Parameters Maintenance Bank Code Bank Short Name ISO Code Bank Name Bank Identifer Clearing Bank Code Address Date Details BEBEI Other Details Credit Suspense Account Debit Suspense Account IB IBD Credit GL IB Credit Account IB Debit Account IB IBD Debit GL Future Dated Bridge Future Dated Bridge Position Currency l GL_CR g GL_DR Tax Receivable GL 1 Withholding Tax GL 1 VAT GL Account Tax Receivable GL 2 e A Withholding Tax GL 2 Branch Vault Cash GL Cash Overage GL Bank Cash GL Cash Shortage GL FX Profit Sundry GL FX ProfitLoss GL ELCs Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Credit Suspense Account Specify a GL code for the credit suspense account Offline credit transactions that are rejected by the host after becoming online will be posted to this GL 2 33 The branches can manually reverse the entries from this GL and post them to the relevant accounts after corrections Debit Suspense Account Specify the GL code for the debit suspense account Offline debit transactions that are rejected by the host after becoming online will be posted to this account The branches can manually reverse the entries from this GL and post them to the relevant accounts after corrections IB Credit Account Specify the GL code for the inter branch credits Th
116. ccount Revalued This is the revalued account Account Balance This indicated the account balance 32 16 ORACLE Lcy Eq before reval This indicates the local currency before revaluation Ley Eq after reval This indicates the local currency after revaluation Profit Loss This is the profit or loss incurred Profit Loss Amount This is the profit or loss amount Pnl Account This is the profit or loss account Currency This is the currency for which transaction details is being reported Rate This is the revaluation rate Category This is the category 32 11 Core Exception Report This report gives details about core exception in Core Exception screen To invoke this screen type CSRPEXCP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below Core Exception From Date To Date Report For All Modules Selected Modules Report 1 Of 1 Selected List ReportFormat PDF Printer At Client Report Output Print Printer 32 17 ORACLE From Date Specify the start date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record from this date To Date Specify the end date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record until this date Report For Specify whether you want to generate the report for al
117. ccount code thus becomes a part of the customer account number e Currency Type 1 digit This will represent the currency type of the account currency As explained for account code you will select a 3 digit currency code during account generation The system will convert it to the currency type maintained for that currency The currency type will then form a part of the account mask e CIF Number You can also include the CIF number of the customer as part of the account mask The CIF number is automatically generated by the system when you capture customer details in the Customer Information Maintenance screen During customer account maintenance you can select the CIF number from the option list provided e Sequence Number 1 digit The sequence number is automatically generated by the system for a combination of account code currency type customer This means that for this combination you can maintain nine accounts To maintain the 10 account for the same combination the system will use the Dummy Customer No Range maintained at the branch level Refer the section titled Creating Branches of this document for more details on dummy number range e Control Number 1 digit This is the 13 digit of the account number This number is also automatically generated by the system based on the Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm For the above combination the customer account mask would be pbbTZCCCCCCSd
118. ces button on the Branch Parameters Maintenance screen 4 14 Branch Parameters Preferences Netting Suspense General Ledger Walk In Customer Internal Swap Customer Clearing Account Offset Clearing Account Weekly Holiday 1 Weekly Holiday 2 Clearing Bank Code MIS Group For Currency Interdict Timeout Interval Status Processing Basis Provisioning Frequency Uncollected Funds Basis Minor Age Notice Period Back Value Details Back Value Days LCY Msg Pref In this screen you define the following preferences m __ Iinterdict Validation Required da _ il Deferred Statement Generation enterprise General Ledger Elcg Reference No Required x ElBack Valued Check Required Profit and Loss Adjustment Revaluation Split Details rack Previous Year Profit And Loss Adjustment Revaluation Split Required Suspense Product Maintenance Debit Product Description Credit Product Description International Banking Account Number MASKS Bank Code Account Number Cheque Number Mask Cheque number mask LDAP DN Template LDAP DN Template e The netting suspense GL into which settlement entries for netted FX Contracts should be posted e The CIF Number against which all Walk in customers should be identified e The format in which the IBAN Account Number and the Bank Code should be captured
119. cseossensovseosecesssceteerovedesseosasescasesbeceavedstesvbstbudtepennntenbra EE EEE ETSEN 4 2 4 2 BASIC PARAMETERS FOR BRANCH cccscorsoscsnsnssonsvonsvesvseesstevssonenbsensvonsvavonsnseonssnnetevsneeseoesssesnenseodseonensostenss 4 3 4 2 1 GONE AL DOTA STAD ccssuccssicdensscvaneennsestadaceessscsevedeeevessatntes tabedenseinsedecestelaneveaneabebsduacsceengessoytind e 4 4 4 2 2 Maintaining Financial Details for Branch w scccesccesssecessceenseteseceensecueceenceceseeseaeeceaeeeeaeecsaeeeeatecsaeeesnes 4 8 4 2 3 Capturing Additional Details scisso siiani oaoa a E edhe testes te E EN AA EERS 4 12 4 2 4 Maintaining Preferences siccviccassedenidiasstestandelcdevevissdeeaben gon e EE EE S aa 4 14 4 2 5 Maintaining LCY Message Preference for Branch cccccccesccesecese sete enseenseeseesseeeseeseeeseceseenaeenaeenas 4 23 4 2 6 Maintaining SWIFT Address for Branch cccsccesceesceesseeseessceseceecusecsecaeeeaeeeseeeseesseeseceneeeseseaeeaeenas 4 24 4 2 7 Defining Account Parameters siisii EAEE EA EEA E ENOTA RES EA 4 25 4 2 8 Maintaining Customer Number Range ccccccsceesseessesseesecesecesecusecasecaeecseeeseeeseesseesseeneeeseeeaeenaeenas 4 26 4 2 9 Maintaining Global Interdict Functions 1cccscecceesseeseeeeceseceecesecsecaseeseeeseesaeesseesseeecsseenaeeaeenas 4 28 4 210 Maintaining Tax Cycle iranieni a E O asa Hage 4 29 4 2 11 Maintaining Clearing Currencies ccccccecceccceescesscesecesecesecusecsecseeeseeese
120. ction in the Daily Processing of IC chapter of the IC User Manual for details on end of day processes on Auto and Manual liquidation 30 2 6 Maintaining Details for Free Banking For account classes for which a free banking period is being provided you can indicate the free banking parameters These include The number of days after the account opening date for which no charges would be levied on the account This is the free banking period Charging for the account would commence when the free banking period has elapsed Whether an advice charge start advice is to be sent to the customer indicating the commencement of charging on the account The number of days before the charge start date the charge start advice is to be sent to the customer indicating the commencement of charging on the account 30 2 7 Specifying Initial Funding Preferences You need to specify the following details pertaining to initial funding for opening accounts under the account class me ORACLE Event Class Code Specify the event class code maintained for initial funding process for the module code DE This adjoining option list displays all valid event class codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Charge Role to Head Code Specify the class code that you wish to use for posting charge related accounting entries for initial funding This adjoining option list displays all valid class codes maintained in the system You
121. cy This way the Treasury would be able to track its profit and the branch s profit by passing a single consolidated entry Position transfer from one branch to the Treasury branch at the treasury rate This option is applicable only if the local currency of the different branches is the same This option is applicable only for Fcy1 Fcy1 transactions For other transactions namely Fey1 Fcy2 Lcy Fcy Fcy Lcy IB entries would be based on IB Parameters Maintenance Acumen Transaction Code You need to check this option in order to eliminate the deals transactions uploaded from the Acumen in the Hand off of transactions affecting FCY Position to Acumen from Oracle FLEXCUBE Gris is applicable where Oracle FLEXCUBE interfaces with Acumen Acumen is an Integrated Turn key solution for Treasury Derivatives and Capital Markets Covering Front Risk Control Middle Office from Login SA Exempt Advance Interest Check this box to indicate that all the postings with this transaction code should not be considered for penalty interest calculation Statement Day Basis You need to specify when the transaction associated with the selected Transaction Code should appear in the account statement The available options are e Current Working Day e Previous Working Day 18 2 1 3 Accounting Entry Processing to Calculate Statement Date The accounting entry processing will be enhanced to calculate the Statement Date based on the Transaction Cod
122. d as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 Euro Method all months have 30 days February included Feb 30 days In 30 Euro Method February always has 30 days leap year or not March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 114 days when the interest period crosses from a non leap year to a leap year or otherwise the basis of actual days has to be treated separately in each year 30 Euro 365 Method 10 000x10 100x1 14 365 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 Euro Method all months have 30 days February included Feb 30 days In 30 Euro Method February always has 30 days leap year or not March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 114 days 30 Euro 360 Method 10 000x10 100x1 14 360 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 Euro Method all months have 30 days February included Feb 30 days In 30 Euro Method February always has 30 days leap year or not March 24 days include from date exclude to date oe ORACLE Total 114 days 30 US Actual Method 10 000x1 0 100 x 30 365 84 366 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 US Method all months hav
123. d take care not to check for all bank induced transactions like service charges interest payment calculation brokerage and charges etc os ORACLE Example Your bank has a policy of limiting savings withdrawals without additional charges to only 8 in a month Beyond which all withdrawals would be charged For the ninth and onward withdrawals in the month from any account the system will maintain a count for computing charges However care should be taken to exclude all bank induced transactions from the count Interest and Charges Turnover inclusion Every debit or credit entry is passed under a transaction code If for a transaction code you have checked I amp C turnover inclusion then the debit turnover credit turnover balance under that code would be picked up by the system as chargeable depending upon the option specified in the I amp C module Therefore you should take care not to check for all bank induced transactions like service charges interest payment calculation brokerage and charges etc Interest and Charges Balance Inclusion Check this box to indicate that the transactions posted under this code should be considered for the purpose of computation of Remuneration Interest By default this option is checked Uncheck this box for such loan transactions or any other transactions for which you wish to exclude computation of remuneration interest Once the transaction code is authorized you cannot change your
124. d the effective sell spread is 0 0006 1 6051 1 6045 In the Rates screen where you define rates and spreads for a currency pair you can specify the buy and sell spreads as 5 and 6 instead of as 0 0005 and 0 0006 i e as spread points and specify here the points multiplier as 0 0001 The effective spread buy and sell rates are then computed as follows Effective buy spread Buy spread x Points multiplier 5 x 0 0001 0 0005 Buy rate Mid rate Buy spread 1 6045 0 0005 1 6040 oe ORACLE 12 Maintaining Exchange Rates 12 1 Introduction In the Currency Rates screen you can maintain exchange rates for a currency pair the rates at which you buy and sell one currency for another A bank determines its buy and sell rate for a currency pair by applying a spread i e its profit margin to the mid rate of the currency pair Mid rate is the basic rate at which a currency pair is exchanged The spread applied for a currency pair varies with the transaction type while the mid rate usually remains constant Consequently different rates are applicable to different transaction types For instance dollars in currency are purchased at a certain rate while USD traveler s checks are bought at a different rate In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can define a rate type which you would like to associate with a transaction type e g CASH TRAVCHKS etc in the Rates screen In the Currency Rates Maintenance screen you defin
125. ddress Phone Number Specify the phone number of the branch SDB Branch Type Specify the SDB branch Type The option list displays all valid SDB branch types maintained in the system Select the appropriate one CC Level Select the CC level from the drop down list Higher Level CC Specify the high CC level The adjoining option list displays the valid High CC levels Computing Center Specify the computing center for the branch The adjoining option list displays the valid codes of the computing center Clearing Sector Code Specify the clearing sector code You can select the appropriate code from the option list IBCC Level Specify the IBCC level During replication the system defaults this to 0 However you can modify this Higher Level IBCC Specify the higher level IBCC value During replication the system defaults this to 0 However you can modify this Last Batch Update Specify the last batch number 4 2 4 During replication the system defaults this to 0 However you can modify this Department Specify the department code FLEXCUBE Branch Check this box to specify the branch is operating under Oracle FLEXCUBE DD Payable at Par Check this box to specify the branch for PAP DD issuance Internet Banking Check this box to indicate this branch for DD issuance and TD opening through the net banking channel Maintaining Preferences To specify your preferences click Preferen
126. default setting of the system e For identification the working days are marked in black and the holidays in red e All unauthorised records appear against a blue background On authorisation of that record the background disappears 24 1 2 Defining Clearing House Holidays To define any other weekly holiday for the Clearing House other than the default double click on the day of the week listed on the top row of the screen For instance if you double click F all Fridays in the year would be marked as holidays To clear off the default weekly holidays Saturdays and Sundays double click on sa and s written on the top row To specify other holidays double click on that date the date would be marked as a holiday If you want to unmark a day specified earlier as a holiday double click on it once again You will notice that the day gets marked in black Because the change is yet unauthorised it appears against a blue background 24 1 3 Designating Unexpected Holidays for Clearing House The holiday calendar for your clearing house is maintained in the Clearing House Holiday Calendar screen In addition to the holiday calendar you may need to designate certain days as holidays unexpectedly without forewarning Alternatively you may also need to roll back a previously defined holiday date or set of dates You can do this using the Unexpected Holiday Maintenance screen alia ORACLE You can invoke t
127. des or groups to be used for posting the balancing entries Interdict Validation Required For your branch you need to indicate whether Interdict Validation is required for all Customers Customer Accounts Funds Transfers Standing Instructions Foreign Exchange Letter of Credit and DD transaction processed within your branch The options available are e Yes the details of CIFs and Customer Accounts captured in the specific branch of your bank will be sent to the GI system as and when they are captured in Oracle FLEXCUBE e No the details maintained in the specific branch will not be sent to the GI system for online verification Interdict Timeout Interval If you indicate that the details should be sent to the GI system you will also have to specify the interdict timeout interval period If the response time from the GI system takes longer than the time that you specify in this field the transaction will be timed out since the processing time exceeds the time stipulated in this field If you enable this preference you will have to identify the Code or ID of the function in Oracle FLEXCUBE for which such a validation should be performed by clicking on the GI button in the Branch Parameters screen Status Processing Basis In the Branch Parameters you can indicate the basis upon which status processing must be done at the branch for customer accounts as well as loan contracts Status processing can be done either at an
128. difference between Buy Rate and Mid Rate It can be defined as the profit margin specified over the mid rate when you buy currency 1 for currency2 You can define the buy spread in two ways either in points or in percentage System calculates the effective buy spread for you Sale Spread This is the sell spread for a currency pair It can be defined as the profit margin specified over the mid rate when you sell currency 1 for currency 2 You can define the sell spread either in points or in percentage The system computes the effective sell spread for you This is applicable if the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is not checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level If the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level Sale spread is displayed by the system This is the sell spread for a currency pair Sale spread is the difference between Sale Rate and Mid Rate It can be defined as the profit margin specified over the mid rate when you sell currency 1 for currency 2 You can define the sell spread either in points or in percentage System calculates the effective sell spread for you Buy Rate Buy rate is the rate of exchange for a currency pair which is computed by the system based upon the mid rate the spread specified the spread definition and the quotation method maintained in the Curr
129. e Minimum Schedule Days Minimum Amount Tax Details Limit Maximum Amount Tax Details Limit C cy Mandatory Tax Details Field PC Category PC Transaction Code Cluster id Default Tenor Maximum Tenor Installment Frequency Days Months ears Maximum Schedule Days Minimum Installment Amount Allow Rollover You can opt to automatically rollover a deposit if it is not liquidated on its maturity date Choose the Auto Rollover option to automatically rollover deposits opened under the account class Time Deposits that are open and marked for Auto Rollover will automatically be rolled over during the Beginning of Day operations on the Maturity date You can define the terms and conditions for the new deposit while maintaining the deposit account in the Details for Deposit Type Account screen Close on Maturity Deposit accounts opened under an account class can be closed automatically on the Maturity Date of the deposit You can specify this for the account class you are maintaining by choosing the Close on Maturity option a ORACLE If you choose the Close on Maturity option during the Beginning of Day operations on the Maturity Date the account will be closed The principal will be moved if specified to the account your customer has directed If the deposit remains unclaimed you can opt to move the principal and interest to the respective Unclaimed GLs maintained at your bank If you
130. e maintained only if e You want to define a direct exchange rate for the pair for frequently traded currencies like DEM USD or USD GBP or USD JPY for which market quotes are available e You want to define a through currency for the pair for those currencies which are not so well traded market quotes may not be available Therefore you can route the conversion rate for the pair via a through currency For example in the case of GBP NLG for which a direct exchange rate may not be available you can define a through currency say USD The exchange rate between GBP USD and NLG USD will be picked up by the system to compute the exchange rate between GBP NLG In the absence of a direct exchange rate the system will look for a through currency to compute the rate If a through currency has not been maintained then the default local currency will be picked up as the through currency to compute the rate for a currency pair Maintaining Parameters for Currency Pair Currency Pair A currency pair specified as Currency1 and Currency2 in the Currency Pair screen represents the two currencies for which you need to maintain exchange rates To specify the pair choose from the list provided against Currency1 Select the pair for which you want to maintain parameters The pair should be selected according to the quotation method followed by the market which could be direct or indirect for details refer to the field quotation method
131. e 30 days only for February are the actual number of days calculated Feb 29 days In 30 US Method actual days are accounted for the leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 114 days when the interest period crosses from a non leap year to a leap year or otherwise the basis of actual days has to be treated separately in each year 30US 365 Method 10 000x10 100x114 365 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date Jan 30 days In 30 US Method all months have 30 days only for February are the actual number of days calculated Feb 29 days In 30 US Method actual days are accounted for the leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 114 days 30US 360 Method 10 000x10 100x1 14 360 In this method the number of days is calculated as follows Dec 30 days include from date exclude to date es ORACLE 8 2 6 Jan 30 days In 30 US Method all months have 30 days only for February are the actual number of days calculated Feb 29 days In 30 US Method actual days are accounted for the leap year March 24 days include from date exclude to date Total 114 days Specifying Currency Cut Off Parameters You can choose to restrict the time within which or before which funds transfer transactions involving a specific customer product and a currency must be received for pr
132. e Dialog Module Customer Contract Reference Run Date E Q Search Advanced Search Records per page 15 w 3 he LOCK 1 of 1 Module Customer Contract Reference Currency Outstanding Amount Run Date In this screen you can query based on any combination of the following fields 6 7 e Module e Contract Reference e Customer e Run Date After specifying the parameters for the query click Search The system displays all the records matching the parameters specified Click Report button to view the Print Options screen In this screen you can specify the print format output and the printer details of the report 4 Print Options Web Page Dialog Format PoF Output Output Print O view Spool Printer Printer In this screen you can specify the following details Format Select the format that should be used for report from the adjoining drop down list The list displays the following values e HTML e RTF e PDF e Excel Output Specify the type of output that should be used for the report You can select one of the following options e Print e View e Spool Printer Specify the printer that should be used for printing The adjoining option list displays all the printers that are maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one 6 9 7 1 7 2 7 Transaction Related Maintenances Introduction This section explains the transaction r
133. e GL entries for all inter branch transactions are recorded in this account At the end of every business day the balance in this account across all the branches in the bank should be zero For the transactions done on accounts of other branches contra Inter branch entries are generated automatically by Oracle FLEXCUBE during End of Day and posted against this GL IB Debit Account Specify the GL code for the inter branch debits The GL entries for all inter branch transactions are recorded in this account At the end of every business day the balance in this account across all the branches in the bank should be zero For the transactions done against accounts of other branches contra entries are posted against this GL For the transactions done on accounts of other branches contra Inter branch entries are generated automatically by Oracle FLEXCUBE during End of Day and posted against this GL IB IBD Credit GL Specify the GL code for the inter branch international business department credits The GL entries for all inter branch transactions are recorded in this account At the end of every business day the balance in this account across all the branches in the bank should be zero For the transactions done on accounts of other branches contra Inter branch entries are generated automatically by Oracle FLEXCUBE during End of Day and posted against this GL IB IBD Debit GL Specify the GL code for the inter branch international business depart
134. e IBAN Sub screen of the Customer Account Maintenance screen Dual Ccy Deposit Check this box to enable the account class for Dual Currency Deposit DCD type Dual Currency Deposit DCD is a short term currency linked deposit that allows you to earn a higher interest rate than regular time deposits You will be allowed to check this field only for Deposit Account Type If this box is checked for other Account types system throws an error EEFC Account sn ORACLE 30 2 1 Check this box to indicate that the accounts created under this account class are EEFC accounts It is applicable only for current account types The box is not selected by default For more information on EEFC details refer chapter Processing Bills in the Bills and Collection User Manual Natural GL The reporting of all turnovers of the particular account class will be directed to the GL that you identify as the natural GL Based on the characteristic of the account balance you can specify whether the turnover is to be posted to the Debit GL or to the Credit GL For instance if the account class is for overdrafts the balance is normally a debit whereas current accounts normally do not have a debit balance Specifying Account Statement Parameters For each account class that you maintain you have the option of generating account statement details periodically for all customer accounts associated with the account class If you need to
135. e Maintenance and the Statement Status at the Branch level The following illustration explains the calculation of Statement Date Assume two Transaction Codes TXN1 and TXN2 have been defined with Statement Date Basis as Current Working Day and Previous Working day respectively The Statement Date would be derived as follows ee ORACLE For a transaction C1 posted on say 25 Jan 2004 with TXN1 the Statement Date would be derived as 25 Jan 2004 irrespective of the Branch Statement Status For a transaction C2 posted on 25 Jan 2004 with TXN2 the Statement Date would be derived as the Previous Working Day of 25 Jan 2004 if the Branch Statement Status is set to N specifying that the Branch is not yet ready for periodic statements processing For a transaction C3 posted on 25 Jan 2004 with TXN2 the Statement Date would be derived as 25 Jan 2004 if the Branch Statement Status is set to Y specifying that the Branch is ready for periodic statements processing The Statement Date would be stored as part of the archived data also The Statement Date would be recomputed during the reversal entry in the same logic 18 2 1 4 Monitoring Anti Money Laundering Anti Money Laundering Required Check this box to indicate that AML monitoring is required for all accounting entries linked to the particular transaction code Leave it unchecked to indicate otherwise Product Category If you indicate that AML tracking is required for al
136. e This branch acted as bridge Products Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a single product or for all products If you choose Single you need to specify the product code for which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid product codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one User Indicate whether the reports should be generated for a transactions entered by all users or a single user If you choose Single you need to specify the user ID based on which the report needs to be generated The option list provided displays all valid user IDs maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one From Specify the date from which the transactions need to be considered for report generation To Specify the date until which transactions need to be considered for report generation Print Copies Check this box to indicate that the report needs to be printed Click OK to generate the report 32 2 ORACLE 32 2 1 Contents of Report The contents of this report are discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the modules covered in the report the product codes covered in the report batch information transactions covered in the report and printing prefe
137. e accounts for the same combination the dummy customer number range will be utilized This is explained with the help of an example Example Assume that you have maintained the following CIF range for your branch Start CIF No 100000 End CIF No 198999 4 27 4 2 9 Start CIF No 100000 Start Dummy No 199000 End Dummy No 199999 Ms Jennifer approaches your bank to open a savings account in your branch branch code is 000 Further the CIF and account number masks maintained for the branch are bbbnnnnnn and pbbTZCCCCCCSd respectively As per the CIF mask Ms Jennifer is assigned the CIF number 000123456 According to the account number mask the 6 to 12 digits will be the last six digits of the CIF number which is 123456 The account number of the first savings account in USD opened for Ms Jennifer is 000411234561 we will consider only 12 digits for this example since the 13 digit is auto generated by the system based on Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm The components of the account number 000 4 1 123456 1 are as follows e 000 is the branch code e 4 is the account code e 1 is the currency type e 123456 is the CIF number for Ms Jennifer e 1 Jis the sequence number for the combination of account code currency type and customer i e the number 4 1 123456 will be common for the first 9 accounts maintained for the same combina
138. e dynamic type if its value is picked up from the Oracle FLEXCUBE table Eg Product Group A running number would always be dynamic in nature Use in Sequence Generation You need to indicate whether the component being defined should be used in sequence generation or not Specify YES or NO as per your choice You can also choose to display the reference number in the advices that are generated for a contract Component Length You can also specify the length of each component in the sequence format The component value is dependent on the component length maintained For instance if you specify 2 as the component length the value should comprise of only two characters Component Value As stated earlier the component value is dependent on the component length Based on the length you can specify a value comprising of as many characters as specified in the Component Length field However this field is used only if the value of the component is required to be constant static type in all the user reference numbers generated at your bank If the component value is changing constantly Dynamic type for every contract the system will automatically pick up the value from the DB table based on the SQL query that you maintain for the purpose Component Column and Component Table If your component is of the dynamic type you will need to mention the name of the Oracle FLEXCUBE column from where the system will pick up the compo
139. e following order or preference e Currency mismatch balancing entries e Value Date mismatch balancing entries In the case of mismatches in accounting entries due to inter branch transactions the inter branch balancing entries are generated before any balancing entries for currency mismatches and then finally the value date mismatches Routing Mask A mask defines the manner in which a Routing Number is generated for your bank It is on the basis of the routing number that Oracle FLEXCUBE processes clearing transactions 2 4 The following is a typical mask format BBBbbbSSS wherein BBB indicates the bank code pbb indicates the branch and SSS indicates the sector to which the branch belongs On the basis of the routing number clearing transactions are routed to the appropriate branch of your bank Clearing Bank Code Specify the code by which your bank is identified in the Clearing Network you participate in This has to the same as that specified for your bank in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen 2 1 4 Maintaining General Preferences In this screen you can define format masks for general ledger CIF choose if batch numbers should be auto generated by the system specify the details for cheque numbering etc H Bank Parameters Maintenance Webpage Dialog Bank Code Description External Bank Code External Bank Code Financial Preferences General Preferences Format Masks Yea
140. e made available to all the branches of your bank Invoke this screen by typing CYDCDEFN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Currency Definition Web Page Dialog Currency Code Alternate Currency Code Currency Name Currency Type ISO Numeric Currency Code Country zz Position General Ledger Decimals Position Equivalent General Ledger Interest Method 30 Euro 360 y Tolerance Limit Spot Days Index Base Currency Foreign Exchange Netting Days Settlement Days Cut Off Time Days Generate 103 Index Flag New COV format Required CLS Currency Euro Conversion Validate Tag 50F PC Currency Country Mapping Fields Input By DOC16 Date Time Modification number ag Open Cancel ir Authorized By Date Time WB authorized If Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking is integrated with Oracle FLEXCUBE Core system the currencies maintained here will be available in Oracle FLEXCUBE Core system Maintaining Currency Details Currency Code Currencies are identified in Oracle FLEXCUBE by the SWIFT codes assigned to them The currency will be identified by this code in all transactions that involve it Currency Name You can enter the detailed name of the currency in not more than thirty five alphanumeric characters S ORACLE Currency Type As per your bank s requirement you can choose to clas
141. e system a time level Both the system and the users are set to different time levels Only those users who have a time level equal to or greater than the system time level can log into the system A control clerk during the EOC process does the change in time level status Fund Branch Even though the fund and the bank are in the same database the fund is treated as a different legal entity and as such the books of the fund are maintained separately from those of the bank Funds are created in a separate branch and any transaction initiated in the fund branch belongs to a fund Check this box to indicate that the branch you are maintaining if is a fund branch Since the fund is a different legal entity it should not be possible to initiate inter branch accounting entries from the fund branch Any settlement with an external entity is routed through the normal settlements interface In order to facilitate this all the account fields in the system accept only the accounts in the transaction branch if the branch happens to be a fund branch EOC Status Under EOC status one of the following alphabets will be displayed which stand for the following B Beginning of financial input indicates system transactions in progress l Indicates that user transactions are in progress 4 7 4 2 2 T End of user transaction input indicates system transactions in progress F End of financial input system transactions also completed E End
142. e the transaction Override Types for Batch Functions For exceptions occurring during execution of automatic or batch processes you can assign the Ignore Override or Error sensitivities 25 1 2 Specifying Override Type In the Overrides Maintenance screen all the error messages that would appear in each module with their respective error codes are displayed The functions with respect to which the error messages could be encountered are also displayed You can invoke this screen by typing CSDOVDMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Overrides Maintenance Web Page Dialog a 2 x l Language Language ENG Description Error details Error Code 10001 Message No Data Found Type Error zj I contirm Function IFATMMN Param 0 Batch Type Error Y Branch Details New Error Code Function id Branch Code Old Error Code Input By ate 0 Modification Number 1 open Authorized v ate 0 fv Authorized ee ORACLE In the Type field you can specify for each error message the appropriate sensitivity level Ignore Override Error Online Authorization or Dual Authorization For error messages in respect of automatic or batch functions you can specify the appropriate level in the Batch Type field Ignore Override or Error For certain overrides to which you have assigned the level Override Online Authorization or Dual Authoriz
143. e the detail of the IBAN account for a specific customer you have to enable the IBAN Required option by enabling it Subsequently click the M button The IBAN details sub screen will be displayed Location An address for a customer account is based on the Location and Media combination Location codes maintained through the Account Address Location Type Maintenance screen are made available against this field The address maintained here is always the primary or the default address Each customer can have several addresses for a particular media To distinguish between one address of a customer from another for a given media it is essential for you to specify a unique location for each address Also if you are amending an address here the same gets updated in the Customer Account Address Detailed table after the validations are through Media Indicate the media for which the charge should be levied Select one of the following options from the option list e Mail e Telex e SWIFT e Fax Options IBAN Required Check this box if IBAN is required Bi ORACLE Mt210 Required Check this box if MT210 is required Back Period Entry Allowed Check this box if back period entry is allowed Turnover Limit Preferences Turnover Limit Code The system displays the turnover limit code applicable to the account 29 4 ORACLE 30 Account Class Maintenance 30 1 Introduction In the O
144. e the mid rate buy and sell spread applicable to each rate type the buy and sell exchange rates are computed by the system Buy rates and sell rates can either be maintained by individual branches or can be input by the HO and propagated to all the branches If in the Bank wide parameters Preferences screen you have specified your preference as copy exchange rates to branches then the currency rates maintenance screen is maintained at the bank level by your Head Office These rates are then propagated to the branches The branches can only view the rates but cannot make changes to them In the Bank wide Preferences screen if you have not specified copy exchange rate to branches then the Currency Exchange Rates Input screen is maintained at the branch level by the different branches You can invoke this screen by typing CYDRATES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button ae ORACLE The screen appears as shown below Currency Exchange Rates Input Webpage Dialog EE E Currency1 Currency2 currency Rates j je Rate Type MidRate Buy Spread Sale Spread Buy Rate SaleRate RateDate Rate Serial E Fields Input By Date Time Modification Number WB Authorized Authorized By Date Time lal Open In this screen you maintain the following parameters for each rate type of a currency pair e Mid rate e Buy spread and Sale spread e
145. e values applicable e Previous MT942 This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since previous MT942 would be sent in the current interim statement e Previous MT940 MT950 This indicates that all transactions posted and authorized since previous MT940 MT950 would be sent in the current interim statement If this option is selected user will have to specify the cycle of account statement to be considered Minimum Debit Amount and Currency Specify the minimum transaction amount for the debit transaction which is eligible for reporting in the interim statement This amount should be qualified by a currency The amount for the corresponding account currency will be defaulted from here while opening the account Minimum Credit Amount and Currency Specify the minimum transaction amount for the credit transaction which is eligible for reporting in the interim statement This amount should be qualified by a currency The amount for the corresponding account currency will be defaulted from here while opening the account Generate Balance To indicate that accounts under certain account classes are to be considered for generation of their balance messages check this box The valid values for this action are Y and N Of Select the mode of message for balance generation form the option list Report Transaction Since This is a list of all the transactions the accounts under a class have undergone in the interval of balance
146. ecify the Suspense GL for posting all those accounting entries for which no GL has been specified or the specified GL has been closed e Define preferences such as the retention duration a CIF number for walk in customers and the GL for netting FX contracts e Maintain customer number range for generation of CIF numbers for customers of your bank The HO creates the branches at the bank level All subsequent modifications on the table are done from the respective branches 4 1 1 System Features Oracle FLEXCUBE supports a three level reporting structure HO Head Office RO Regional Office BR Branch HO Reports directly to HO gt q Reports to RO1 RO2 RO3 e to BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 BR5 BR6 BR7 At the top stands the Head Office followed by the Regional Offices At the lowest level are the branches There can be any number of branches or regional offices 4 1 The branches report to the RO and the ROs in turn report to the HO Within this three level structure you can also have a branch reporting independently to the Head office as branch BR7 in the diagram It is also possible to have a two level reporting structure with only the HO and the branches where each individual branch reports directly to the HO 4 1 2 Creating Reporting Structure The order in which you create the HO the ROs and the branches should follow the hierarchy Hence the first branch to be created should be the HO followed by the ROs
147. ed Information ERI fields in the Settlement Message Details screen Assume the following scenario e The settlement account is an EUR account e You have to settle an amount of DEM 10000 e You have defined the ERI currency for DEM as DEM e The Tolerance Limit for DEM as 0 05 e The exchange rate 1 Euro 1 30 DEM The settlement amount in Euro would therefore be 7692 36 rounded to nearest higher cent This amount will be reported in Field 32A of the settlement messages Now if you want to furnish the settlement amount in the ERI currency in this case DEM you have to manually enter the DEM value in the ERI Amount field You may enter DEM 10000 EUR 7692 36 actually converts into DEM 10000 068 The value that you have entered is well within the Tolerance Limit of 0 05 defined for DEM Therefore this value will be reported in Field 72 of the settlement messages Since the Tolerance Limit for DEM is 0 05 you can specify an ERI Amount between DEM 9995 and DEM 10005 DEM 10000 0 05 100 DEM 5 If you enter an ERI value exceeding DEM 10005 or less than DEM 9950 the system recalculates the ERI Amount at the time of generating the settlement messages The recalculation will be on the basis of the pegged rates between the Settlement Currency and the ERI currency The system validates the ERI amount only when generating the settlement messages It does not validate the ERI amount at the time of input in the Settlement Message Det
148. ed for an account class in the Interest and Charges module The account class table is maintained at the Bank Level by the Head Office branch 30 2 Maintaining Account Classes You can invoke the Account Class Maintenance screen by typing STDACCLS in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button a ORACLE Account Class Maintenance Web Page Dialog Account Class Description Account Code Start Date End Date Account Type Dormancy Days Account Statement Format Display IBAN in Advices InterPay Dual Currency Deposit No Frills Account EEFC Account Debit Credit Natural GL Dormancy Parameters Secondary Account Statement Parameters Type None Type Summary Input By Date Time Modification Number Authorized By Date Time Tertiary Account Statement Parameters Type None Nostro NRE Misc Dr NRO Mise Cr FCNR Savings Current Deposit Line Account Primary Account Statement Parameters Debit Type None Credit Summary Any Detailed Manual Cycle Statement Day Offline Limit None Provisioning Details Summary Auto provisioning required Preferences REG Deposit Auto Deposit GL Lines Status Rule Amt Block Restriction MIS Branches Currencies Customers Categories Fields Statement HRI W Authorized Open Defining an Account Class includes the maintenance of the following p
149. ed in the Limits screen ORACLE e The interest calculation account maintained in the Interest and Special Conditions Maintenance screen will have to be the same as in the Limits screen However the Interest Booking Account maintained in the Interest and Special Conditions Maintenance screen can be some other account belonging to other account class types Since accounts can be of different types you need to indicate the type of account for which you are defining an account class It could belong to any one of the types mentioned above Account Code As per your bank s requirement you can choose to classify account classes into different account codes The bank can decide the manner in which the account classes are to be assigned to different account codes An account code can consist of a maximum of four characters Depending on the customer account mask maintained the value in the account code field would be used during the generation of customer account numbers through the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen If you have decided to include account code as part of the customer account number in the account number mask then at the time of creating a new customer account number you will need to select the account class for the account number being generated In the option list provided the account class is displayed along with the associated account code When the account number gets populated it is the
150. ed to Active from Dormant since the Transaction Code associated with the account has the Consider for Account Activity option enabled Dormancy Parameters As stated above if Transaction Code associated with the account has the Consider for Account Activity option enabled the dormant status of the account will be updated to Active Apart from this you can specify the parameter that is required for re activating the account To indicate the re activation parameters for the dormant account choose any from the following options e Debit e Credit e Any e Manual In case of a transaction the system will check for the parameter you have specified here and accordingly change the status of the account However the parameter maintained at the account level will super cede the parameter you have specified here Display IBAN in Advices For an account class you can indicate whether the IBAN number of the customers involving the accounts within the class should be printed on advices sent to the customer If you would like to print the IBAN number of the customers on advices sent to the customers involving the account class you can enable the Display IBAN in Advices option by checking it Your specification will be made applicable to all customers linked to the account class You will be allowed to change this option for a specific account IBAN Account numbers for specific customers can be captured while defining a specific account through th
151. ed to maintain account numbers beyond the end account number Let us assume that you are have maintained the following details in the Account Parameters screen at your bank Customer Account Mask nnnnn Start Account Number 1 End Account Number 50000 Cust Acc Auto Generate Yes While generating a new account number the system will automatically generate 00001 corresponding to nnnnn The next account will be 00002 Including Value of a UDF as Part of Customer Account Number If your bank has not opted for automatic generation of account numbers you can specify a structure for customer account numbers The structure can be a combination of CIF number account class value of a user defined field currency branch code alphabets numeric and a check digit which is automatically generated by the system Example for an account mask is CCCCCCCLLbbbUUU ad This implies that a customer account number will contain e CIF Id represented by C e Account Class represented by L e Branch Code represented by b e Values of a user defined field represented by U e Any user input alphabet represented by a enter n if you want to include a numeric e Currency Code represented by e A check digit which is automatically generated by the system represented by d The number of C s in the account mask should match with the CIF mask that you have specified For instance if the CIF mask is aaaannn 7c
152. ed to operate the nostro account maintained by the Head Office Suppose Ms Tina Shenoy has an account with branch 001 She makes a request to her branch manager to pay one Mrs Tanya Agnihotri in New York 1000 USD from her account Thus Branch 001 will instruct Citibank New York to make the payment to Mrs Agnihotri and debit the nostro account of it s Head Office If the preference specified is Through HO then this inter branch transaction will be routed through the main branch 000 The following movement of funds will be involved 1 At branch 001 the customer s account will be debited and the due to branch 000 account will be credited 6 6 6 2 2 At branch 000 the Nostro account will be credited and the due from branch 0071 will be debited At branch 001 Debit Ms Shenoy s account Credit Due to Branch 000 account At branch 000 Debit Due from Branch 001 account Credit Nostro account Viewing Outstanding Amount Details When you run the CSOSAMT batch it picks up all the active contracts on that date and updates the outstanding amount of the contracts You can view the outstanding amount of a contract in the Contract Outstanding Amount Details screen To invoke this screen type CSSOSAMT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button A Contract Outstanding Amount Details Web Pag
153. eed 30 characters You can use the identifiers a for alphabets and n for numerals as the identifiers to capture the length of the bank code 4 21 e The Account Number of the customer account The bank in which the customer account resides assigns this number You can use the identifiers a for alphabets and n for numerals as the identifiers to capture the length of the account number Suppose that you maintain an IBAN mask in the following format DDCCaaaaaaaaannnnnnaaaaaannnnnnnnn While capturing the IAB number you have to strictly adhere to the format mentioned above USccCHASEBANK000101CBNYLI450000026 In place of the cc s the system will generate the check digit algorithm based on the Country Code Bank Code and Account Number combination The Bank Code Mask After indicating the IBAN mask you have to specify the mask for the Bank Code The Bank Code mask is a combination of alphabets and numerals Therefore you can specify A and N as the identifiers Subsequently while capturing the bank code in the IBAN screen each of these characters will be replaced with the respective alphabet or numeral For instance let us assume that you have maintained a 15 character mask for the Bank Code AJA IASA A A A A A N NJN N NIN You will have to capture the corresponding bank code in the same format C H A S E B A N K 0 0 0 1 0 1
154. eeeeeeeeeeceseseaecaecaaecaeeeseeeneees 4 31 4 3 MAINTAINING VALUE DATE SPREAD FOR BRANCH ccccessessesecssesscsecescsseesesseceuesecsesseesseessesecssenesseeenenes 4 31 44 MAINTAINING TAX CYCLE sarri E AE AE A RE EA R E E E 4 33 4 4 1 Updating Lax Cycle siririca a E E ARARE EENE E A RE 4 33 4 4 2 Account Statement Handoff ririri ii nE E NE E NEA EA 4 33 4 4 3 Ac ouni Statement GENETALION ienie n E E RA n R Ee E E R 4 34 4 5 MAINTAINING ROLE TO HEAD MAPPING AT BRANCH LEVEL cccsccsssescsseescesecesesecseesseseeeesesecssesecseesnenes 4 35 4 5 1 Viewing Accounting Role to Head Mapping Details c ccccsccesccescceseenseeseeeeeeseeseeeesensecnsecnseonaeenss 4 37 5 SYSTEM DATES MAINTENANCE 1 cccssssssssssscscssscescssssssssssssscsneesesssesssssssnessssssesessscsssssssessssnessossessosees 5 1 5 1 INTRODUCTION 02 5ssesscrvebsdisscaveess vettnannsedvesnsbestnennsedvatevessrdurdenst estesipencvsnetesssess shee dueitavsssihvonsseadiassvettedesseastenes 5 1 ORACLE 5 1 1 Maintaining Dates Change wisisecsicssecsssiionsvaseesaaessscpesseosesestoosieninesnaseceayeierseevsipudeopsinndonseasadeapsdpesssavageas 5 2 6 ACCOUNTS FOR INTER BRANCH TRANSACTIONS eessssesesesecceessoeseseseecesososoesesecoerosorsesesoeoesosoeseseeeee 6 1 6 1 DEFINING ACCOUNTS FOR INTER BRANCH TRANSACTIONS cscsssescsseescssessseseseeesessesseeseeeesesesssesessenenenes 6 1 6 1 1 System PF COUUTES recrryiriiiiineea o i an SE ANE EEE EEE KARESE Ea AKABE E
155. eference numbers generated at your bank You can define it as a user component In addition if you want to use the manipulated value of an Oracle FLEXCUBE Column in the sequence format you can specify it as a User Component For eg you may want to include ONLY the first four characters of the product group in the sequence number In this case the component would be defined as a User Component e A Separator To separate the various components from one another you can use the component known as the separator Eg a back slash a hyphen etc mes ORACLE e A Running Number Each contract is identified by a unique sequence number It is mandatory to maintain a running number as a component in the sequence format If not included you will not be allowed to save the details of the format A running number is internally generated by the system Component Type You need to identify the type of each component in the sequence format A component can be constant through out or change for every contract processed at your bank You can associate a component with one of the following types e Static To include any hard coded component in the sequence format you will specify the type to be static For instance you may want the first two characters of your bank s name to be part of all the user reference numbers generated at your bank The component type would be static in this case e Dynamic You will specify the component to be of th
156. eis E E E pustagde atys S 32 12 32 8 ACTIVITY JOURNAL REPORT cccsesssceccceceessssececececsesneaececececsenssaececececsesesaseeeececeeseaaeseeeceeseneaaeseeececeenes 32 13 3261 Conten S Of Repoti a a i n A E E E e AE 32 13 32 9 CORE EXCEPTION REPORT ccccccesssssscecececsensenececececsessaaececececsesssaeceeececseeaaeeeeceecsenesaeeeeeeeceeneaasseeeeeceenes 32 14 329 1 Contents Of REPOT cciana aa i n A E ERE e AES 32 15 32 10 REVALUATION REPORT cccecsessssececececsesneaeceeececeesssaececececeeseaassesececeeseseaeceeeeeeseaaeceeeeeesenseaeeeeeeeeeenes 32 16 32 10 1 Contents OF RED OTE cesen estan gested se E aE E ERE R EE AE pesneetet ses REES 32 16 32 11 CORE EXCEPTION REPORT cssesccsccececsessesececececsesssaececececeesesaesecececseseseaeseccceesesaaeceeeeeesesesaeeeeeceeeenes 32 17 32 12 CURRENCY FORWARD RATES REPORT ss scsssscessesssececececseseaecesececeesesesecececeesessaaeceeeeeesessaeeeeeeeceenes 32 19 ORACLE 1 About this Manual 1 1 Introduction This manual is designed to help you quickly get acquainted with the Core Services module of Oracle FLEXCUBE It provides an overview to the module and provides information on using the Core Services module of Oracle FLEXCUBE Besides this User Manual you can find answers to specific features and procedures in the Online Help which can be invoked by choosing Help Contents from the Help Menu of the software You can further obtain informatio
157. elated maintenances required when Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking system is integrated with Oracle FLEXCUBE Core system Maintaining Transaction Codes for FC Core You can maintain transaction mnemonic codes using Transaction Code Maintenance screen This maintenance can be used for linking a service charge applicable to the transaction or attaching an advice format to the transaction To invoke the screen type STDFCTRC in the field at the top right corner of the application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button FCCORE Transaction Code Maintenance Transaction Code Transaction Literal Dricr None Credit Debit Transaction Description Reversal Flag Advice Format Code Transaction Type Base Transaction Code Base Description Validate Cheque Status Maker Checker Mod No Specify the following d Transaction Code EDormat Account Post ladvice generation Flag ElReimburse ElsSuppress SMS E mail Date Time Date Time Record Status Authorization Status etails Type of Arrear Service Charge Code SC Code Description Spend Class Internal Transaction Attributes Transaction Category Transaction Mode Channel Module kl Specify the unique code that represents the transaction This code acts like the fast path The fast path is a mnemonic which allows the user to access the screens transactions directly bypassing the requirement
158. elating to update of GL balances on line or at the End of day e Preference relating to Position Accounting e Interface details Click the Preferences button to invoke the Preferences screen Preferences Web Page Dialog a Interface Details Journal Account Width Inter Branch Scheme Inter Branch Entity zj Inter Branch Account Schedule z Preferences J7 Online General Ledger Update JT Auto Generate CIF Numbers T Copy Exchange Rates to Branches JF Position Accounting Required T Daily MIS Refinancing T Propagate Floating Rates to Branches JF Limits History Required T Branchwise Limits JT Pairwise Positioning Required T Propagate CIF to other Nodes E Propagate Customer Address to Nodes E Propagate Bank Instruction Codes Details to Nodes I Allow Inventory Tracking Maintenance of Customer l Identification Mask at Hodewise CIF mask Maintenance 2 1 8 1 Specifying Inter Branch Scheme Inter Branch Account Schedule You can indicate the route through which accounting entries for inter branch transactions should be settled You can select one of the following routes from the option list that is available 2 20 e Choose Through HO to indicate that inter branch transactions should be settled through the Head Office e f you specify Through RO the accounting entries would be routed through the regional office If two branches involved
159. ely authorized because no application of Oracle FLEXCUBE can be run without date change authorization e If you have input any date modification you cannot authorize it A user with a different login ID should do it e For a branch you can have only one system dates record e Any modification in date be it an authorized or unauthorized record can be done any time after today s EOD and before BOD for the next day is run You can modify the next working date any time before running the EOD for the current day To authorize click authorize icon on the toolbar If any modifications were made on the system date the old and the new values will be displayed After which an alert box will warn you that the dates change will be authorized You will be prompted to confirm Click to confirm The change will be authorized If you do not want to authorize the change then click delete icon you will be returned to the screen from where you invoked the authorization function Click Exit button to exit and return to the Application Browser 5 2 6 1 6 Accounts for Inter Branch Transactions Defining Accounts for Inter Branch Transactions A transaction that takes place in a branch of your bank may involve accounts that are maintained in another branch For example a customer has an account in the Head Office branch and approaches another branch of the bank for a cash withdrawal For each combination of branches that may
160. ences regarding account holder facilities interest computation etc 12 Indicating whether status change for all accounts belonging to the account class should be automatic or manual 13 Identifying and assigning preferred branches currencies and customers to the account class 14 Specifying whether receivables should be tracked for the account class This specification will default to all accounts that are linked to this account class 15 Specifying whether reordering of Cheque Books for all accounts linked to this account class should be triggered automatically or not If yes the parameters for the same 16 Specifying liquidation preferences for debit interest and charges to notify your customers through a Debit Interest Notification message in the case of charges a Charge Notification message before debiting the customer s personal current account for debit interest or charges 17 Maintaining initial funding details for new accounts Each of the parameters has been discussed in detail in the subsequent sections Account Class and Description The account class code is a unique 6 character code which identifies the class Along with the class code you need to assign an appropriate description to the account class For instance let us assume you are defining a class for savings account of individuals You could associate the code SB IND with it Similarly the description that you associate with it could be something like t
161. ency The system validates the ERI amount only when generating the settlement messages It does not validate the ERI amount at the time of input in the Settlement Message Details screen Currency pairs In the Currency Pair Definition screen you can specify a Through Currency When maintaining a pair involving an In currency In Out and In In you can only specify the Euro as the Through Currency You cannot maintain a Through Currency for a pair constituted by an In currency and the Euro aei ORACLE 8 4 2 Maintaining Conversion GLs To facilitate the currency conversion process two additional parameters need to be maintained in the Branch Parameters screen You have to maintain a common Conversion GL and a Transaction Code that identifies redenomination entries E Branch Parameters Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x EJ Branch Code 006 Branch Name American Bank Chicago JF Branch Available General Details Financial Details Suspense General Ledger Financial Cycle Real Local Currency 459501104 SU CCOUNT Current Cycle FY2000 Cont Local Currency CA9501102 COUNT BR 006 Current Period QT3 Real Foreign C 439501104 SUPENSE ACCOUNT atr Aa Referral Cut Off Time Cont Foreign Currency CA9501102 SUSPENSE ACCOUNT BR 006 Hours 4 ATM Minutes 30 Euro Redenomination General Ledger Conversion General T Job Status Ledger n JZ Auto Authorisation Co
162. ency definition screen This is applicable if the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is not checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level Sale Rate Sell rate is the rate of exchange for a currency pair which is computed by the system based upon the mid rate the spread specified the spread definition and the quotation method maintained in the Currency definition screen You can also input the buy and sell rate for a currency pair In which case the system will compute the spread for the rate type This is applicable if the Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate check box is not checked Preferences screen at the bank parameters level a ORACLE Rate Date This is a display field When you enter the exchange rate for a currency pair the system will default the Rate Date as the Application Date The rate date will always be less than or equal to the application date Rate Serial This is a running serial number for the Rate Date You need to specify the serial number You entry will be validated for uniqueness For example there could be only one exchange rate between USD and EUR for 31 07 2003 with Rate Type STANDARD with Rate Serial as 0001 Thus this will be a unique rate serial for a currency pair rate type combination for a given rate date When you enter the exchange rate for a currency pair the system will default the Rate Date as the A
163. endly Neighborhood Bank has three branches e Los Angeles Branch which is the Head Office Branch Branch Code 000 Houston Branch Branch Code 001 e Chicago Branch Branch Code 002 Ms Sally Williams has an account in branch 002 and wants to withdraw USD 20 000 from her account in Branch 001 If the inter branch scheme is Through HO this inter branch will be routed through the Head Office For this inter branch withdrawal you need to specify the following e Currency Code USD e Customer Accounts at Branch 1 gt Due From Sally Williams account in Branch 001 gt Due To Account of Branch 002 maintained at the Head Office Branch 000 e Customer Accounts at Branch 2 gt Due From Account of Branch 002 maintained at the Head Office Branch 000 gt Due to Sally Williams account in Branch 002 Therefore by specifying the customer accounts involved in an inter branch transaction you are indicating the settlement route for the transaction Accounting Entries in Inter Branch Accounting An example Suppose the University Savings Bank in Headington Oxford has three branches 1 Roosevelt Avenue Branch which is the Head Office branch Branch code 000 2 Foxlake Drive Branch Branch Code 001 3 Mountainwood Road branch Branch Code 002 Branch 000 has a nostro account with Citibank USA bearing a balance of USD 1 million Branch 001 and 002 do not maintain USD nostro accounts but are authoriz
164. ent transactions involving a currency are applicable to the head office branch of your bank If the branches are in time zones other than the head office branch time zone you must maintain the offset time applicable for each branch in the Branch Parameters screen Even when cut off days and cut off time for a currency have both been specified the cut off checks are performed for a funds transfer transaction only if specified as applicable for the product involved in the transaction Position or Position Equivalent GL for a currency If you have opted for position accounting in your bank you should indicate the Position GL and the Position Equivalent GL when maintaining a foreign currency in the currency screen the Currency Definition screen When maintaining the GLs in your bank you can opt to link the different foreign currencies associated with the GL to either of the following e The Position GLs that you specify here for the corresponding currency e Position GLs of your choice Tolerance Limit When you are maintaining an In Currency or the Euro in the Currency Definition screen you can define a Tolerance Limit for it The limit is expressed as a percentage The implication During the transition period settlement of components in In currencies can be made either in the same currency or in the Euro EUR depending on the settlement account s maintained Similarly components in Euro can either be
165. eported both in Nostro account currency in Field 32A and in an ERI currency that you specify in Field 72 In Oracle FLEXCUBE this information is captured in the European Related Information ERI fields in the Settlement Message Details screen Assume the following scenario e The settlement account is an EUR account e You have to settle an amount of DEM 10000 e You have defined the ERI currency for DEM as DEM e The Tolerance Limit for DEM as 0 05 e The exchange rate 1 Euro 1 30 DEM The settlement amount in Euro would therefore be 7692 36 rounded to nearest higher cent This amount will be reported in Field 32A of the settlement messages Now if you want to furnish the settlement amount in the ERI currency in this case DEM you have to manually enter the DEM value in the ERI Amount field You may enter DEM 10000 EUR 7692 36 actually converts into DEM 10000 068 The value that you have entered is well within the Tolerance Limit of 0 05 defined for DEM Therefore this value will be reported in Field 72 of the settlement messages Since the Tolerance Limit for DEM is 0 05 you can specify an ERI Amount between DEM 9995 and DEM 10005 DEM 10000 0 05 100 DEM 5 If you enter an ERI value exceeding DEM 10005 or less than DEM 9950 the system recalculates the ERI Amount at the time of generating the settlement messages The recalculation will be on the basis of the pegged rates between the Settlement Currency and the ERI curr
166. eque serial number is generated sequentially starting from 0001 This running serial number is assigned taking into account the last check number issued for the account Cheque Numbers Unique For Branch For cheque numbers that are automatically generated you can choose to make cheque numbers unique across the branches of your bank 2 10 2 1 5 2 2 1 5 3 If you indicate that serial numbers need not be unique you can have the same cheque number assigned to cheque leaves of different accounts within a branch In effect cheque numbers remain unique to an account Lodgment Numbers Unique for Branch You can indicate whether lodgment leaves must have unique numbers in a branch or must be unique for individual accounts Example In the Bank Wide Parameters you have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique for the branch This means that lodgment numbers need to be unique across all accounts of that branch For instance if a book is maintained with the Start Number as 1 and containing 25 leaves you cannot start another book in respect of any other account with these numbers If you have specified that lodgment book numbers must be unique to accounts in the branch and a book is maintained with the Start Number as 1 and containing 25 leaves you cannot start another book in respect of the same account with these numbers However you can start a book with the same numbers in respect of another account in the branch Spec
167. er Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status If Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking is integrated with Oracle FLEXCUBE Core system the branches created here will be available in Oracle FLEXCUBE Core system Specify the following details Branch Code This is the code you assign to the office or branch The code acts as an identifier in the system for the office branch Input a code using a maximum of 3 characters alphanumeric Branch Name This is the name of the office or branch the code of which is input Enter the name using a max Of 35 characters alphanumeric Branch Available Status The system displays the Branch Available status If the status is Yes it indicates that the branch can accept transactions for the day and if the status is No then it indicates that the transactions will be accepted but it will be in effect only from the next business day Accordingly accounting entries will be passed checking the following for tanking branch transactions e The Branch Available Status e The Branch date and host date i e entries will be tanked if branch date is ahead of host date When the Branch Available status is NO or if branch date is ahead of host date then the transactions will be tanked These transactions will be untanked by the BOD program which runs post date change i e POSTDTCH If you want to check whether the transaction is tanked or not you shou
168. er Euro Type When the transition period ends the national currencies of the participating countries would cease to exist as valid legal tenders The Euro would be the only legal tender in the participating countries Consequently the Euro changes made to Oracle FLEXCUBE will no longer be required You can turn off the changes at the end of the transition period by e Closing all In currencies and e Choosing the Euro Closed option for the Euro ba E Currency Definition Web Page Dialog Currency Code Alternate Currency Code Currency Name Currency Type ISO Numeric Currency Code Country a Posttion General Ledger Decimals Position Equivalent Interest Method 30 Euro v360 Son padae Tolerance Limit Spot Days Index Base Currency Foreign Exchange Netting Days Settlement Days Cut Off Time Days Generate 103 Index Flag New COV format Required CLS Currency Euro Conversion Validate Tag SOF PC Currency Country Mapping Fields Date Time Modification number El open cancer Cancel W Authorized Tolerance Limit When you are maintaining an In Currency or the Euro in the Currency Definition screen you can define a Tolerance Limit for it The limit is expressed as a percentage The implication During the transition period settlements of components in In currencies can be made either in the same currency or in the Eur
169. es not change Intra day Release If you want uncollected funds on a transaction posted using the transaction code to be manually released intra day that is within the day select the Intraday Release option The Intraday Funds Batch when manually executed during the day picks up those transactions that are due for release on or before the system date which have been posted with the transaction code with the Intraday Release option enabled for release of uncollected funds The Intraday Release option cannot be enabled if the Availability specified for the transaction code is Immediate You can use the Intraday Funds Release batch process to perform the intra day release of uncollected funds in respect of transactions posted using a transaction code for which the Intraday Release option has been enabled For details about invoking the batch process refer the Current and Savings Account user manual 18 2 1 2 Specifying Preferences This field indicates your preferences regarding transactions booked against this transaction code The preferences marked relate to the following Interest and Charges Transaction Count Every debit or credit entry is passed under a transaction code If for a transaction code you have checked I amp C transaction count then all entries made under that code would be picked up by the system as chargeable transaction counts which would be used by the I amp C system to compute charges Therefore you shoul
170. es the next day the change in the currency conversion will be in place In addition balances will get restored Example You decide to re denominate the account BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 of Customer Number SP1000 from Deutsche Mark DEM to EURO You have specified that the liquidation cycle is to be monthly The currency conversion is carried out on the 17 of the month The interest liquidated from the 1 to the 17 will be put in the Acquired Interest GL On the next liquidation date i e the 30 of the month the interest liquidated from the 1 to the 17 is converted to Euro and transferred from the Acquired Interest GL to account BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 Additionally the interest calculated from the 17 to the 30 is also credited or debited to the account depending upon the type of account An example of the EOD BOD processes The following example illustrates the accounting entries passed when currency conversion is made Account Name BOAB001BNKCUFINRA2 Account Currency Deutsche make DEM The Bank s LCY USD The Standard Exchange Rate between DEM and EURO 2 5 Requirement The account currency has to be converted from DEM to EURO oe ORACLE The Value Dated balances as of the 17 of the month are as follows 17 Jan 99 18 Jan 99 19 Jan 99 100 000 Cr 120 000 Cr 80 000 Cr The following are the accounting entries passed as of the 17 for the Account BOA
171. escription of the module code selected Local Currency Message Type Specify the local currency message type that you need to associate with the module Maintaining SWIFT Address for Branch Click the SWIFT Address in the Branch Parameters screen to invoke Additional SWIFT Address screen The screen appears as shown below 4 24 Branch Parameters Additional Swift Address Branch Name Swift Addresses 1of1 Swift Address Description cal You can specify the SWIFT addresses related to the branch in this screen 4 2 7 Defining Account Parameters Customer Account Masks can be defined at the Branch Level or at the Bank Level Click the Account Mask in the Branch Parameters screen to invoke Account Parameters screen Account Parameteres Customer Account Mask Checksum Algorithm User Defined Algorithm Customer Account Consumer Number Start Account Number End Account Number cust Account Auto Generate Loan Account Auto Generate Auto Account Creation Start Account Number End Account Number 4 25 For further details refer to the section Specifying the Account Generation Parameters at Bank Level under Bank Parameters chapter in this user manual 4 2 8 Maintaining Customer Number Range You can specify a number range based on which the customers of your bank will be assigned CIF numbers for identification Since
172. esesecoeoosoroeseseecssesosoeseeesoerosoeseseeeee 31 1 31 1 GUARDING AGAINST MONEY LAUNDERING ccceccsscsseseeeeseesenecsenseecsesesecsesenecsensesecsesesecsesenecseseneesey 31 1 ORACLE 31 2 MONITORING AML ACCOUNTING cccscsesesssssssssssessscsssessssessessessssenssensssnsesssesseesssssssensssnseensesrssesseeenes 31 1 32 REPORTS a cisksscssececstasiateassascssocssnssessoascescessesssscestenssanestensssesccesossssnsssonsscosssvsbessnsescnssadebessessieaasssasseossevceasee 32 1 32d JANTRODUCETION onenn inai a E e a S 32 1 32 2 LIST OF DELETED TRANSACTIONS sonreir E EEE A EOE S 32 1 32 21 Contents of REP OTE csseirioii re E ERNE ENEE A NEEE E 32 3 32 3 ACCOUNTING JOURNAL s ner N a TEE E E e ENE 32 4 32 4 FUTURE DATED ACCOUNT BALANCE REPORT ccccssssssscesececeesessesececececeesusaeseeecccsesseaseesececeeseaaseeeeceesenea 32 8 32 5 CURRENT RATES REPORT Tsetere on e I sued edvbesteuedesnenselotendvtesesaececebegtedosesierdesseerees e 32 10 325 1 Contents of REP OTE sedeisecsuevesiecsivesnvsiocstentnaesaesvetieds sixisciesgsevedyetaansdsiesa vel veteivesscuboedaetworsdscververtesveneaees 32 1 32 6 RATE HISTORY REPORT c cccccccccssssssececececsesssaeceeececeesnaaecesececcesesaesesececeeseaaeseeeeeceenesaeeeeeeceseneneseeeeeesenes 32 11 32 7 ACCOUNT CLOSING CONFIRMATION ccccccesssssssecececsesnsaececececcesesaecesececeesssaeeeeececseneaeaeeeeeceeseasseeeeeceenes 32 12 327A Conten SOf REPOT eena a i pouty S
173. estetteaaevsaeneuavensealeviegnaanpedts taeviaveesmieleadersaleeusy 9 1 9 2 MAINTAINING CURRENCY DENOMINATION DETAILS c ccscccsesecssesseseeescseeeseseseeesesseseeseeeeseessuesesseseeenes 9 1 10 EXPRESSING AMOUNTS IN WORDS esessesesssossesesoecososossesesoeoooososoesseoooososseeesosoosorosoesosoesssososoessessoseos 10 1 EO INTRODUCTION 3523 scbes 36s uses ea seascei sat sases cesses E a EEEE E E SE A a E N 10 1 11 DEFINING CURRENCY PAIRS sscssssscsssssssscsssssssssssccsssessssssssessssnsssesseesessssssssssenesssssessossessosees 11 1 11 1 INTRODUCTION pecsecssccsiscscsutss tsnccvecnscestsavescenceveczsvendsagenceveczevseeuedsuaevesnes segsedunesventevsesteavesaes vis riaa ES ESS 11 1 11 2 SYSTEM FEATURES ccs iscssinessccsces sven cubesurstesscovtevevsnsunestcoveontd supseusnsevesnes sesutostesvonnevscsncaveuses EEEE E E 11 1 11 3 MAINTAINING PARAMETERS FOR CURRENCY PAIR c cscccscesescsesecssesscseeescssesesesecseesecsesesesaeeesesesseeseenesene 11 2 LES A Specifying Points Multiplier iscissi R E veux sup seenedbou 11 5 12 MAINTAINING EXCHANGE RATES eseseesesssossesossesosososoeoosoossossosoossesooonosseoosesoosososoesesoossossosoessesosssss 12 1 12 1 INTRODUCTION i cess cst e e E ER EEE AE A SA EEE S 12 1 AZAD Authorizing Exchange Rates sicuani a A a RA 12 5 I21 2 Revising Exchange RateSiiccncesnennroana E A E EE 12 5 121 3 Viewing Exchange Rateseisinisiceienrnirii a A N E NEEE 12 5 12 1 4 Specifying Limits for C
174. fer Security Management System user manual Tanking of records has been enabled only for the following function Ids ae ORACLE e STDCIF e STDCUSAC 27 2 1 Tanking New Records During the creation of a new record if Tanking Required option is enabled the system tanks the details of the newly created record till the record gets authorized Any query on this data retrieves this stored information 27 2 2 Tanking Modified Records All modifications to unauthorized records get tanked and the modified data gets written to actual tables only after authorization In this case the record remains in Authorized status in the actual table and the unauthorized modifications will be kept pending for un tanking The most recent modifications will be shown in both summary and detailed screens with the Authorization status as Unauthorized 27 2 3 Closing a Record You can close a record only if it is in Authorized state without any unauthorized modifications pending for un tanking Closure is possible only for records that are in Open status When you close a record the system tanks this and the record gets actually closed only after the closure gets authorized 27 2 4 Re opening a Record You can re open a record only if it has been closed and the closure is authorized Re opening of a record gets tanked till it gets authorized and the actual re opening happens after the authorization 27 2 5 Authorizing a Reco
175. ferences you must also indicate e The accounting roles and heads representing the GLs to which the accounting entries for provisioning must be passed for each account status e Whether provisioning entries for an account must be rebooked when provisioning is done after an automatic status change for the account You can maintain these details for each account status in the Status Details screen iv ORACLE 30 2 9 Maintaining Status Codes for Account Class Current and Savings accounts that have not generated any interest over a specific period or have remained inactive with interest overdue may be identified as NPAs Non Performing Asset In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can assign different status codes to an account class which will be applicable to all the accounts under it The accounts will move from one status to the other based on the number of days they have remained inactive in the system The status of an account will determine whether the account should be marked as an NPA or not Further you can also specify the reporting lines for GL Central Bank and Head Office to which accounting entries should be passed when an account moves from one status to the other You can post all debit and credit balances of one account class to a single General Ledger account Conversely you also have the option of posting debits and credits to separate GLs The status codes and the reporting lines for each status may be defined in the St
176. for a currency pair if the third currency is the local currency as defined in the Bank wide Parameters screen because in the exchange rate computation the default third currency is assumed to be the local currency The currency pair screen is maintained at the bank level by your Head Office branch using the Currency Pair Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CYDCPAIRP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Currency Pair Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x EI Currency Pair Currency1 AUD Description Australian Dollar Currency2 DEM Description Deutsche Mark zA Through Currency Through Currency Number Of Units Code EUR One Description EURO Hundred Thousand Quotation Method Spread Definition Direct Percentage gt Fields Input By VAY ALAK Date Time 7 3 2000 16 50 36 Modification Number 1 Iv Open Authorized By Date Time i Authorized System Features From among the currencies maintained in the currency screen the system builds all possible combinations of currencies in pairs For example if you have maintained the following currency codes USD DEM YEN The system will give you a choice of defining parameters for the following pairs e USD DEM e USD YEN e DEM USD oC ORACLE e DEM YEN e YEN USD e YEN DEM It is however not obligatory to define parameters for all these pairs A currency pair needs to b
177. for which the report is being generated Contract Ref No The reference number of the contract being reported Counter Party No The CIF ID of the customer involved Counter Party Name This is the name of the customer involved User Def Status The status if the user defined elements Event Date The date on which the event took place Seq No The sequence number of the event Event Description The description of the event Contract Status The status of the contract i e active closed etc Maker ID The identification number of the maker Checker ID the identification number of the checker Reversed Seq No The reversed sequence number 32 9Core Exception Report This report gives details about core exception in Core Exception screen To invoke this screen type CSRPEXCP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 32 14 ORACLE e Core Exception Webpage Dialog BE E From Date lala To Date Report For C All Modules C Selected Modules pena 1 18 I Selected List 2 32 9 1 Contents of Report The contents of core exception have been discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report Body
178. for your bank the user who has opened the batch could adopt either of the following courses of action e If the override is configured to be an error the system will not allow the user to close the batch without balancing the mismatches e Ifthe override is configured to be a warning either Override or Ignore the user can save the batch with the mismatches No balancing entries are automatically generated by the system for the mismatch Uploaded journal entries In the case of uploaded journal entries a journal batch that has mismatched entries is not rejected but an override is raised by the accounting process Depending upon how the override is configured for your bank the accounting process takes either of the following paths e f the override is configured to be an error then the batch is rejected and must be uploaded again with the corrected entries e Ifthe override is configured to be a warning the accounting process automatically generates the balancing entries for the currency or value date mismatches for the batch and posts them to the requisite control accounts specified in the Bank Parameters In each case the transaction reference for the balancing entries is the same as that of the original accounting entry in which the mismatch occurred and the other details of the balancing entries are by default the corresponding values in the original entries The mismatch balancing entries are generated in th
179. ftware or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services
180. g date For any schedule contract maturing at a future date say 5 years hence you can input a future date only if the calendar for that year has been maintained It is not necessary to maintain the list of all annual holidays for future you can merely define all regular weekly holidays This screen is maintained for each branch of your bank from the respective branches thus making it possible to have a different set of holidays for different branches of the bank 22 2 Invoking Local Holiday Screen Invoke the Local Holiday Calendar screen by typing STDLCHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button ax p M T sY Th F a M T h F 4 M N h F January February March 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 f 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 144 15 16 17 18 19 10 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 2 2 23 24 235 26 47 18 19 20 21 2 23 z 18 19 20 2 22 2 a 28 29 30 1 24 25 25 27 28 24 25 2 27 28 29 30 31 April May June 1 4 6 1 2 3 4 1 7 9 10 11 1 13 5 6 8 9 w0 A 2 4 6 8 14 1 19 20 12 1 14 15 16 17 18 9 10 11 1 15 2 6 27 19 0 1 22 24 25 16 1 1 19 22 28 9 0 26 23 31 23 4 6 29 30 July August September 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 7 3 7 9 1 11 1 13 4 10 8 9 10 11 1 1 14 14 1 16 1 9 20 1 12 13 14 4 15 16 1 1 19 0 21 2 22 23 24 2 2 2 18 19 20 21 23 24 22 23 4 6 28 28 29 30 31 25 2 27 28 29 300 31 29 30 October Hovember December zi Fields Modifica
181. generate account statements that would need to be sent across multiple media generated at different frequencies you can define up to three different frequencies at which the statements could be generated with a primary secondary and tertiary frequency If you are defining primary secondary and tertiary statements the frequency for each must be different and unique for instance if you define a monthly primary statement you cannot define a secondary or tertiary statement with a monthly frequency As part of specifying the account statement preferences you can indicate the following for each of the statements whether primary secondary or tertiary Type The first preference that you specify for each account class is to indicate whether the periodic generation an account statement is required If the generation of an account statement is necessary you have to specify the format in which it is to be generated The options available are e Detailed indicating that the statement should be a detailed account of all the customer transactions within the account class e Summary indicating that only a summary of the transaction details is enough e None indicating that neither a summary nor a detailed account of transactions is required s ORACLE Cycle The system generates the account statement details at a frequency that you specify The frequency can be e Annual e Semi annual e Quarterly e Monthly e Fortnight
182. grouped under a common transaction code with a description This description will be printed on the account statements reports and advices generated For a transaction type you also maintain other related processing details which will be applicable to all transactions posted under a common code Details about availability of funds for liability checking SWIFT code for the transaction type preferences regarding charges to be levied on turnovers payment to be made through cheques etc 18 2 Invoking Transaction Code Screen You can invoke Transaction Code Maintenance screen by typing STDTRCOD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Transaction Code Maintenance Webpage Dialog Transaction Details Transaction Code Description SWIFT Code MSC Availiability Information Immediate On Value Date After Days with New Value Date After X Days Preferences Cheque Mandatory Interest and Charges Transaction Count Interest and Charges Turnover Inclusion Consider for Account Activity Interest and Charges Balance Inclusion Consider For Turnover Limit Fields Input By Date Time Authorized By Date Time Modification Number MIS Head External Code Anti Money Laundering Monitoring Product Category Statement Day Basis Anti Money Laundering Required Intraday Release Available Balance Check Required Interests and Charges
183. h level in the Limits Query screen Example Consider that the Liabilities Liab 1 2 and 3 are present and different branches want to open different lines under these liability numbers Liab1 Line1 BR1 Liab2 Line2 BR2 Liab3 Line3 BR3 In the above case line 1 line 2 and line 3 are opened in Branches 1 2 and 3 respectively for liability numbers Liab 1 2 and 3 If the Branchwise Limits parameter specified at the bank level is checked then the branch allowed for each of the above lines would default as the branch in which these lines are opened and you will not be able to change the branch restriction setting in the Limits Restrictions screen under Limits This in turn would restrict the above mentioned lines for liability to only the corresponding branch Example For Liab1 Linei BRI The branch allowed would be BR1 Hence during contract input in BR1 you would be provided with only one option i e line1 Now if you wanted to use another line facility in Branch 1 you would have to open one more line called line4 You would not be allowed to use Line 2 or 3 because the branches allowed for these lines are BR2 and BR3 respectively Therefore if the Branch wise Limits option is checked at the Branch level then the following becomes true Current Branch Liability Line Branch Allowed BR1 Liab1 Line1 BR1 BR1 Liab2 Line4 BR1 2 26 Current Branch Liability Line Branch Allowed
184. h three decimals Interest Method You can indicate the interest rate to be used for transactions that involve this currency The interest options available are e Actual Actual e 30 US 360 e Actual 360 e 30 Euro 365 e 30 US 365 e Actual 365 ie ORACLE e 30 Euro Actual e 30 US Actual e Actual Actual Select the interest method that should be used by default whenever the currency is used in transactions While processing a transaction that involves this currency the interest method defined for the currency is defaulted You have the option to change it for a specific transaction However if you do not specify an interest method for a transaction the method defined for the currency will be used For details refer to Annexure on Page 140 Spot Days The number of spot working days applicable for the currency is specified here Payment advises for FX and MM contracts will be generated on a date which is calculated as the number of spot working days before the Maturity Date of the contract Example The tenor of an MM contract is as follows Value Date 01 01 99 Maturity Date 31 01 99 Contract Currency USD Contract Amount 5000 For USD the number of Spot Days is specified as Spot Days 3 For this contract the payment advices will be sent on 28 01 96 Foreign Exchange Netting Days Oracle FLEXCUBE provides a facility wherein all transactions relating to a customer meant to be settled on a p
185. haracters the account mask should consist 7 C s to include the CIF Id in the customer account number 2 18 The value of a user defined field can be used to include an additional parameter for example the code of the country to which the customer belongs in the customer account number The steps involved for including the value of a user defined field in a customer account number are as follows 1 Include U in the customer account mask to indicate that the customer account number should contain the value of a UDF 2 Create a new user defined field 3 Link it to the Function Id STDCIF 4 Specify the value of the user defined field at the time of creating a customer 5 Specify the UDF whose value has to be included in the customer account number to the Oracle FLEXCUBE implementer The implementer will indicate this at the back end Maintaining Ten Digit Masks with Running Sequence Numbers You can maintain a 10 digit mask of any combination wherein the last two digits will necessarily be a running sequence number This number will be automatically generated by the system For instance if you want to maintain a mask for the customer number and currency combination followed by the two digit running number you will have to maintain the mask as CCCCC SS Here CCCCC stands for the customer number stands for the currency of the account and SS stands for the running number The system will generate the last two digit number in
186. he time will be added subtracted from the Server Time maintained for the bank Hours Specify the number of hours to be offset from Server Time to arrive at the local branch time This is the number of hours by which the branch leads or lags behind the Server Time Minutes Indicate the additional minutes by which the branch leads or lags behind the Server Time 4 6 The reference of time is always the System Time Server Time Ahead The system calculates the local time of the Branch by adding subtracting the Server Time and the Time Zone Offset time When you maintain the offset time for the time zone you need to specify whether the system should add or subtract the offset time from the Time Zone Offset Checking the Ahead box indicates that the offset time is added to the Server Time Consequently if the box is unchecked the offset time is subtracted from the Server Time Additionally the system validates the cutoff time depending on the time you specify here The validation is based on following 3 parameters e Cutoff Time maintained for the currency in Currency Definition Screen e Cutoff Offset Time maintained for the Branch in Branch Parameters Screen e Time Zone Offset maintained for Branch in Branch Parameters Screen Time Level In this field is displayed the system time level status represented by a number between 0 and 9 In Oracle FLEXCUBE user access to the system can be controlled by assigning each user and th
187. hecks the available balance not the current balance while performing the referral checks for all transactions involving the account If a transaction involving the account results in the account moving to overdraft the account and transaction details will be sent to the Referral Queue e Lodgment Book If you wish to allow orders of lodgment books for all accounts that use an account class you can indicate so in the Account Class Maintenance screen by selecting the Lodgment Book option e Back Period Entry Allowed if checked indicates that back valued entries can be posted to account belonging to the class as long as the account is open You will be allowed to change this specification for a specific account While posting back valued transactions the System verifies whether the Back Period Entry Allowed option has been enabled for the account class If the option has not been enabled an error message is displayed This check is also performed while uploading journal entry transactions Enabling Printing of Account Statistics You can enable printing statistics in respect of accounts using an account class either period code wise or financial year wise for the following customer information e Low and High Balance for a period The lowest and highest current balances for the period e Average credit and debit balance for a period This is computed as the sum of credit debit current balances in a period divided by the
188. her debit or credit Transaction This is the transaction code while posting the journal entry Code Module This is the module code of the report Description This is the description of the transaction code Status Status of the transaction Value Date This is the value date of the transaction Account This is the description of the account Description Event This is the event triggered on the transaction Fey Amount This is the transaction amount in a foreign currency Exchange Rate This is the exchange rate used if the transaction is in any other currency Lcy Amount This is the transaction amount in local currency Auth ID This is the user ID of the user who authorized the transaction 32 7 ORACLE Total Debits Total amount debited under the respective user product and module Total Credits Total amount credited under the respective user product and module Grand Total This is the grand total amount of all the debit transaction Debits grouped by transaction code and user Grand Total This is the grand total amount of all the credit transaction Credits grouped by transaction code and user 32 4Future Dated Account Balance Report This report gives balances of future dated transactions You can invoke the screen by typing ACRPFVBL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Future Dated Contracts
189. his Savings accounts of individuals Account Type The six different types of accounts that you can maintain are e Nostro account your bank s accounts with another bank e Miscellaneous Debit Each transaction is entered with a reference number In the miscellaneous debit account a single debit transaction is matched subsequently with credits against the same reference number While posting transactions into this account if the first entry is a debit the subsequent reconciling entries should be all credits ORACLE The system gives you a break up of the balance by the reference number Example Let us assume that for the month of November 2000 your bank has to spend USD 10 000 on miscellaneous expenses which include canteen charges telephone bills and other maintenance charges When the details of these expenses are entered the following entries are passed entry Dr Misc debit a c for 10 000 Cr Cash a c for 10 000 reconciling entry Dr expense a c for 3000 canteen charges Cr Misc Debit a c for 3000 Il reconciling entry Dr expense a c for 2000 telephone charges Cr Misc Debit a c for 2000 Ill reconciling entry Dr expense a c for 5000 maintenance Cr Misc debit a c for 5000 Thus the entire amount that was debited from miscellaneous debit account has been reconciled The total amount of the reconciliation entries should add up to match the amount of the first transaction e Miscellaneous Credit
190. his screen by typing CGDCLHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button A Unexpected Clearing House Holiday Maintenance Web Page Dialog js bk Clearing House C01 Description Clearing House 01 Holiday Working Type HOLIDAY WORKING From 7 11 2001 To 7411 2001 Reason Type Exceptions m Holiday VVorking Date Reversed Flag TM 712001 E Modification Number 1 fv E In this screen for a clearing house you can maintain a range of dates every date within which will be designated as holidays for the clearing house You can also provide a reason for the designation Every unexpected holiday you designate must be authorized for it to be effective 24 1 3 1 Reversing Designated Holiday In the Unexpected Holiday Maintenance screen you can also reverse a designated holiday before the actual date Specify the holiday date in the Holiday Date field and check the Reverse box field alongside it When you designate unexpected holidays any bank or customer value dates for clearing transactions that coincided with the holiday are rolled forward Any accounting entries passed are reversed and fresh entries are passed to reflect the new value date For the release of uncollected funds the original transaction date is considered for availability calculations oe ORACLE 25 Configuring Overrides 25 1 Introduction The system
191. hould be generated automatically by enabling the Auto Batch option Consequently the system automatically generates batch numbers while posting journal and multi offset entries Placing User Restrictions on Data Entry Batches You can restrict the usage of batches to specific user by placing bank wide User level batch restrictions If you enable this option as a Bank Parameter you need to allocate the batch number range for each user through the Batch Restriction Maintenance screen The restriction on the usage of batch numbers is made applicable on data entry and PC transactions The user will be allowed to enter only those batches reserved for the user profile As a result each time a user specifies a batch number it will be validated against the Allocated Batch Number Range This feature is applicable only when batch generation is manual Therefore if you enable this option you must ensure that the Auto Generate option has not been enabled In a scenario where the User Restriction for Batch Number field is enabled and Auto Batch option has also been enabled the following error message will be displayed Not a Valid Batch Number For the User In case you choose to auto generate batch numbers the System will not perform the batch restriction validation You can invoke the Branch Parameters screen by typing STDBREST in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow butt
192. hrough the SDN Upload screen 2 Maintain the details of each SDN manually Both these options have been elaborated upon in the subsequent sections 30 2 4 Specifying your Preferences for Account Class Preferences are the options or attributes that uniquely distinguish an account class The following are the preferences that you can specify for an account class Limit Check you can check this box to indicate that a limit check for sufficient availability of funds in the account will be made for all accounts belonging to the account class Overdraft Facility if checked indicates that all accounts belonging to this class would be allowed an overdraft facility facility to draw a specified amount over and above the balance in the account Interest Charges if checked indicates that for interest and charges computation the Interest and Charges module will process accounts linked to this class Track Accrued IC if checked indicates whether accrued interest in the Interest and Charges module on an account linked to this class would be considered while computing credit utilization for the account Passbook Facility if checked indicates that accounts linked to the account class are issued passbooks ATM Facility if checked indicates that accounts linked to the class will avail the ATM facility Daylight Limit if checked indicates that you can specify daylight overdraft limit for all the accounts belonging to this
193. hrough which accounting entries for inter branch transactions should be settled Customer Transfer Check this option to indicate that transfer transaction should be permitted through the ATM 4 5 Address For each branch of your bank you maintain the following parameters Branch Address Input the address of location of the branch Each line can have a maximum of 35 characters BIC Specify the SWIFT address for a branch using 8 or 11 characters alphanumeric Telex Specify the branch s TELEX address using a maximum of 14 characters alphanumeric Host Name Against HOST enter the name of the Host server for this branch in not more than 35 characters alphanumeric TAN No Specify Tax Deduction Account TAN Number TAN number should be maintained for every bank branch as per the guideline of income tax department to track financial transactions TAN number maintained at branch level is displayed in Form 16A Tax UTN No Specify Tax Unique transaction Number UTN no UTN number should be maintained for every bank branch as per the guideline of income tax department to track financial transactions Tax UTN number maintained at branch level is displayed in Form 16A Specifying Time Zone Offset For branches with different time zones you can define the offset time that is to be displayed in maker checker stamp and all the reports generated for the branch The offset time is specified in terms of hours and minutes and t
194. ically by the system as per the conditions maintained in the Status Rule Definition screen If you do not select this option you have to change the status manually through the Manual Status Change screen These screens are discussed in detail in the subsequent sections of this document This specification will be defaulted to all the accounts reporting to this account class Exclude Same Day Reversal transaction from Statement If you do not wish transactions booked and reversed on the same day to be reflected in the account statement you can specify the preference here This feature is applicable only for the customer account legs and not for the related GL legs Also reversals made through the DE module will not be considered for exclusion Your specification for this at the account class level defaults to all accounts involving the class You can change it for a specific account For comparing transactions the System will look for similarity of reference number and date Consolidation for Inward Clearing You need to indicate whether or not consolidation is required for inward clearing transactions in a batch at the Account Class level The indication for this option is carried forward to the Customer Account Maintenance screen If this option is unchecked here it cannot be checked in the Customer Account Maintenance screen 30 2 4 1 Processing for Consolidation of Inward Clearing During the Inward Clearing process
195. ication tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Core Activity Journal From Date To Date Report For All Modules Selected Modules Report 10f1 Module Report Format PDF v Printer At Client v From Date Specify the start date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record from this date To Date Specify the end date of the report date range The system will include the details of the record until this date Report For Specify whether you want to generate the report for all the modules or selected modules alone If you select Selected Modules you need to specify the modules below Module If you need to generate the report for selected modules you need to indicate the modules here Use the add button to add more modules 32 8 1 Contents of Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows 32 13 ORACLE Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report Body You can find the following details in the body of the report Module The module for which the report is being generated Product Type The type of product
196. ice versa You should select allowed or disallowed depending upon the length of the list 30 2 19 Maintaining Currency Preferences For all accounts under this account class you have the option of specifying currencies in which transactions are allowed disallowed Example You want to restrict all account level transactions under the account class Corporations for corporate type accounts to four important currencies only say USD GBP JPY and DEM You can specify the same But currency preference needs to be accompanied by specifications regarding the minimum balance limit in each currency To do this click the Currency Preference button The Account Class Currency Preferences screen will be displayed a ORACLE Z Account Class Currency Preferences Webpage Dialog Account Class Currency Preferences Allowed Minimum Balance ATM Cash Limit ATM Transaction Limit Minimum Opening Balance Account Opening Charges E All the allowed currencies you have defined for this account class will be displayed in the Allowed column You can enter the minimum balance that should be maintained against each currency You can also specify the minimum amount that should be deposited at account opening This value should not be less than the minimum balance for the currency Additionally you can specify charges that should be levied against each currency for opening a customer account 30 2 20
197. ies Sweep Instructions Change Log Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Record Status Date Time Authorization Status Branch Code The system displays the branch code Account You can indicate the account number of the customer One customer can have any number of accounts Currency Select the currency from the adjoining option list Small Account Number This indicates the small account number a ORACLE Description This is the description of the small account Country Code Specify the country of the customer This adjoining option list displays all valid country codes maintained in the system You can choose the appropriate one Customer No Select the customer number from the adjoining option list If you have included the CIF Number of the customer as part of the Account Mask the system automatically defaults the CIF code of the customer in the respective field You will not be allowed to modify this code Customer Name The name of the customer is displayed based on the CIF ID that you have mentioned in Customer No field Account Class Select the account class from the adjoining option list Statuses No Debits No debits can be posted to the account For example a customer of your bank going abroad for a year instructs you not to debit his account till his return You can execute this instruction by checking this box No Credits No credits can be posted to the customer account by enabling
198. if the component amount is lesser than the lowest amount slab the appropriate rate for lowest slab is picked up an applied Effective Date Each rate that you define for a Rate Code and Currency combination should have an Effective Date associated with it This is the date on which the rate comes into effect Once a rate comes into effect it will be applicable till a rate with another Effective Date is given for the same Rate Code and Currency combination The revised rates will be applied on specific effective dates depending on whether it has been defined with Auto Rate Code Usage or Periodic Rate Code Usage You can specify this in the Product ICCF Details screen ee ORACLE Borrow Lend Ind Here you indicate the type of contracts to which the floating rate should be applied Select one of these options from the picklist e Borrow e Lend e Mid Typically a floating rate maintained as Borrow can be applied on Deposits Rates marked with Lend can be made applicable to Loans and Bill contracts Tenor For each amount slab that you define for a Floating Rate Code you can define tenors and indicate the rates applicable to each tenor The rate will be applied to contracts based on the slab into which it falls and the reset tenor defined for the component ORACLE 16 Period Code Maintenance 16 1 Introduction Banks like all business houses compute their profits and losses and assess their financial position at the end of
199. ified in the Currency pair screen the system computes the spreads In the Direct method the buy and sell rates are calculated as follows Buy Rate Mid Rate Buy Spread Sell Rate Mid Rate Sell Spread For cross currency contracts the rate for the currency pair is ie ORACLE 1 unit of Ccy 1 Rate 1 unit of Ccy 2 In the Indirect method the buy and sell rates are calculated as follows Buy Rate Mid Rate Buy Spread Sell Rate Mid Rate Sell Spread For cross currency contracts the rate for the currency pair is 1 unit of Ccy 2 Rate 1 unit of Ccy 2 Example You have entered into a Buy contract and the currency pair involved is USD AUD where 1 USD 1 4166 AUD In the Currency Rate Maintenance screen the following details are maintained Mid Rate 1 4166 from the Currency screen Rate Type STD Buy Spread 0 07083 Sell Spread 0 07083 You have specified the Quotation method for this currency pair as Direct in the Currency Pair screen In this method the Buy Rate is calculated as Mid Rate Buy Spread So the Buy Rate for this contract is Buy Rate 1 34577 1 4166 0 07083 In addition you have the option of defining the fields that should be computed and those that should be input You can either input the buy and sale rates and get your spreads computed by the system or define the spreads and let the system compute the rates The method of spread definition percentage or points tha
200. ify the exchange rate 1 USD 5 2 FRF The bought amount is therefore 19230 769 USD The settlement account is in EUR The exchange rate between EUR FRF 1 EUR 6 475 FRF Since FRF is an In currency you can settle the sell leg of the deal through EUR in this example The settlement amount would be EUR 15444 015 oie ORACLE 8 4 7 Reports and Advices 8 4 8 The following reports furnish the equivalent Euro values of amounts in an In currency The locked in exchange rates defined for the Euro against the In currency will be used for currency conversions The reports with this feature are the e Currency Position report e Cash Flow report e FX Maturity report These reports will not furnish the In currency and equivalent Euro values when you close the In currencies and choose the Euro Closed option for the Euro in the Currency Definition screen All advices that provide In currency details will also provide the equivalent Euro values Account Statements Statements provided for accounts in an In currency provide the Euro equivalent values of the following e The opening balance e The closing balance e Every transaction Maintaining Transaction Limits This paragraph explains in detail about Maintaining Transaction Limits for Module Product and Currency combination Oracle FLEXCUBE offers you a facility whereby each time a particular transaction processed in
201. ifying TRS Details You can maintain the following details that will be used by the system to raise direct debit for Tax Relief at Source TRS rebate availed by customers on mortgage loans The direct debit is raised during the End of Day EOD process after the LD batch processes Sort Code Specify the destination bank code for which the bank raises direct debits for TRS claims Account Number The destination account for which the bank raises direct debits for TRS claims Payment amp Collection Product Category Specify the Payments and Collections PC product category that would be used by the bank to raise direct debits for TRS claims Suspense Account Specify the account that would be debited with the TRS amount to credit customer account For more details about processing for TRS refer the Loans module user manual and the Payments and Collections user manual Specifying IC Parameters TD Available for OD Linkage Specify the percentage of the TD amount that can be used for OD Linkages 2 1 6 A single TD can be linked to more than one OD account Specifying UDF Details You can associate values to all the User Defined fields created and attached to the Bank Parameters Screen You can view the list of User Defined fields associated by clicking the Fields button The screen appears as shown below User Defined Fields Web Page Dialog xj al Fields Field Name Value al 8581 10 E You can en
202. irst contract LDBD001 based on the Contract Reference Number Subsequent credits to the account will be used towards loan LDBD002 Since contracts with LDBD have earlier schedule dates funds will be allocated to them though as per the product sequence contracts with ADBN should receive the funds first The liquidation schedule date takes precedence in this case Further credits to account A1 will be allocated against the contract ADBNO01 followed by the contract ABCD001 This will be based on the product sequence number since both contracts have the same schedule dates Within a contract allocation of funds towards the various components like interest penalty interest etc will be determined by the Liquidation Order maintained for the loan product To sum up the schedule date of the loan contract takes precedence followed by the product sequence and finally the liquidation order 28 ORACLE If insufficient funds are detected in an account with a receivable tracking the system will trigger the event LBLK indicating that enough funds are not available and that subsequent credits made to the account will be blocked as a receivable 30 2 14 Maintaining Transaction Restrictions for Account Class You can place restrictions on transactions involving customer accounts at the account class level As discussed earlier for customer account these restrictions get defaulted to all accounts that are linked to
203. ith product spread is applicable only for the main interest component and not for the penalty component 20 2 Invoking Tiered Product Spread Maintenance Screen You can invoke Tiered Product Spread Maintenance screen by typing CFDPTRSP in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button P Tiered Product Spread Maintenance Webpage Dialog Branch BCM Product Code BCTP Currency INR Effective Date 11 30 2007 Spread Maintenance Tenor From Tenor To Spread Maker FCDEV Date Time 11 30 2007 19 18 07 Mod No E Authorized I Checker FCDEV Date Time 11 30 2007 19 18 07 v Open In this screen you can maintain the following parameters eai ORACLE Branch Specify the branch for which the spread is applicable The system displays All by default Product Code Specify the product code of the product for which the spread is applicable Currency Specify the currency in which the spread is applicable Effective Date Specify the date from which the product spread is effective Tenor From Specify the tenor from when the spread is applicable Tenor To Specify the tenor up to when the spread is applicable Spread Specify the product spread for the mentioned tenor ve ORACLE 21 Account Revaluation Maintenance 21 1 Introduction Account revaluation is a process by which the LCY equivalent of balances in the FCY accounts is marked
204. iven business day In the Account Revaluation Maintenance you must specify the following parameters that would be used by the batch revaluation process for revaluing FCY entries in Income Expense GLs e Rate type e Transaction code for posting entry based revaluation entries You can maintain these parameters for specific Income Expense GLs If you wish to maintain these parameters for all Income Expense GLs you can specify the STDPNL option in the GL Code field The STDPNL option signifies that the entry based parameters being maintained are applicable for all Income Expense GLs When the revaluation batch revalues an Income Expense GL it uses the rate type and transaction code maintained for the GL in the Account Revaluation screen If no maintenance exists for the specific GL the parameters maintained for the STDPNL GL Code option are used ae ORACLE 22 Maintaining Branch Holidays 22 1 Introduction For a year you need to define your weekly holidays and your calendar year annual holidays This is done in the Local Holiday Calendar screen The system uses the information maintained in this screen to do the following e To check that the value date of no Data Entry transaction falls on a holiday e To check that the start date maturing date and schedule date of a loans and deposit contract does not fall on a holiday e To effect a date change on the system today s date and the next workin
205. l the modules or selected modules alone If you select Selected Modules you need to specify the modules below Selected List If you need to generate the report for selected modules you need to indicate the modules here Use the add button to add more modules Contents of Report The parameters specified while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the report Other content displayed in the report is as follows Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated and the modules covered in the report Body You can find the following details in the body of the report Field Name Field Description Module The module for which the report is being generated Contract Ref No The reference number of the contract being reported Counter Party The name of the counter party Counter Party The name of the counter party involved Name Event Description The description of the event 32 18 ORACLE Exception The description about the exception 32 12 Currency Forward Rates Report This report gives details about forwarded currency rates in Currency Forward Rates Report screen To invoke this screen type CYRFWRAT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button The screen is as shown below
206. l to please note that there is no space between the two symbols Equal to 30 2 13 Maintaining Sequence for Funds Allocation The allocation of funds will occur as per the product sequence you maintain in the Product Maintenance screen invoked from the Account Class Maintenance screen Click the Amt Block button to access this screen The screen is as shown below en ORACLE 2 Product Maintenance Web Page Dialog wlk Account Class TIMDP6 Description Term Deposits A c E o Product Maintenance T Number Product Description 5 In this screen you will specify the sequence of products based on which funds will be made available when a credit is posted to an account with a track receivable option The sequence number is automatically generated by the system All authorized products of your bank will be available in the option list On selection of the product the product description will appear alongside Whenever a credit happens to an account with a track receivable option the system will check if the account has any receivable being tracked against it If yes the amount is blocked as a receivable and this process continues until the amount needed for liquidation becomes fully available The batch process run as part of EOD BOD will liquidate the loan contract or retail teller contracts If the amount received is not sufficient for full liquidation then de
207. l transactions linked to the particular transaction code you have to identify the product category for which AML tracking is necessary 18 2 2 Maintaining Country Name Details You can define country name through the Country Code Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDCOUNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 1e ORACLE Country Code Maintenance Web Page Dialog Country Code Alternate Country Code Country Name ISO Country Code Limit Currency Overall Limit Blacklisted IBAN Mandatory for Payment EU Member Messages Clearing Code in BIC Restricted Fields Input By Date Time Modification number ai Open Authorized By Date Time i Authorized Here you can capture the following details Country Code You can capture a unique three character code to identify the country For example you can maintain USA as the country code for United States of America Alternate country code You can also associate an alternate country code This is for information purposes only and will not be printed on any customer correspondence For example you can have US as the alternate code for USA Country Name After you define an alphanumeric code to identify the country for which you would like to assign a name you have to specify the name of the Country Limit Currency Limit currency refers to the currency in which the bank wants t
208. l which transactions need to be considered for report generation Print Copies Check this box to indicate that the report needs to be printed Position Entries Check this box to indicate that the report needs to cover position accounting entries Report Date Specify the date as on which the report needs to be generated Click OK to generate the report Contents of Report The contents of this report are discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code branch date the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the modules covered in the report the product codes covered in the report batch information transactions covered in the report and printing preference Body of the report The report is sorted by modules Under every module it lists out product wise transaction details The following transaction details are displayed Field Name Field Description Product This is the product code of the transaction 32 6 ORACLE User Id This is the user ID of the user who entered the transaction Reference No This is the transaction reference number Account Branch This is the account branch Account Number This is the account number Currency This is the currency of the transaction Dr Cr This is the nature of the transaction eit
209. ld login to host and refer to the corresponding query function 4 2 1 General Details Tab You can maintain the branch details regarding the local currency the parent branch regional office of the branch address details including telex BIC etc FCCORE Branch Parameters Maintenance Branch Code Branch Name Branch Available Status EISEN Financial Details Additional Details Parent Branch Description Time Zone Offset Regional office Description Hours Country Code Description Minutes Customer Identity Description Wlanead Local Currency Description Time Level Alternate Branch Code Fund Branch EOC Status External Value ATM Details CutOff Offset Time Local Payments ATM Branch Hours Clearing Branch 23 Institution Identification Minutes Inter Branch Transaction Code ustomer Transfer Address BIC Branch Address Line 1 Telex Branch Address Line 2 Host Name Branch Address Line 3 TAN No TAX UTN No SWIFT Address Account Mask CIF Range GI Functions Branch Currency Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Local Currency Specify the currency of operation for your branch and the default currency for all transactions of your branch The income and expense balances of your branch will also be maintained in this currency Parent Branch Parent Branch is to define
210. le FLEXCUBE you can specify the retention period When you run the purge process on any given day only the data that is beyond the retention period that you specified will be purged The following example illustrates this concept Example The requirement You would like to retain foreign exchange contracts that were liquidated 60 days prior to the running of the purge process in the system That is if the current system date is 30 June 1999 and you do not wish to purge the foreign exchange contracts that were liquidated between 1 May 1999 and 30 June 1999 Solution In the Retention Period field enter 60 note this value is expressed in days and in the Status field choose the Liquidated option Result If this setup is authorised and you run the purge process on 30 June 1999 the current system date all foreign exchange contracts that you liquidated prior to 1 May 1999 will be purged Contracts that were liquidated on or after 1 May 1999 will not be purged ae ORACLE 27 Tanking of Maintenance Records 27 1 Introduction The maintenance records that are created or modified in the system can be tanked till they get authorized so that it is possible to undo the modifications if needed before the records are authorized The maintenance log also will store the changes till they get authorized The new or the modified records are written to the static tables only after authorization 27 2 Tanking New and M
211. ll inter branch accounts are maintained you have not maintained an accounting relationship between two branches 000 and 002 Then in case of an inter branch accounting transaction between 000 and 002 the system will first look for a direct relationship since that has not been maintained it will look for a relationship through RO i e if the two branches have a common RO if that too does not exist then through HO the transaction would take place 6 1 2 Specifying Customer Accounts System determines the settlement route for inter branch transactions by considering the customer accounts that you specify for a particular currency in this screen Example Let us assume that your bank has to processes a transaction in USD involving your branch Branch Code 001 and another branch Branch Code 002 If you maintain the customer accounts for the branch pair 001 002 and currency USD system will accordingly determine the settlement route 6 4 6 1 2 1 Branch and Branch2 To specify a branch pair for which you want to define the customer accounts you can choose from a list of maintainable branch pairs displayed by the System The description of Branch 1 and Branch 2 are displayed below the respective branch codes Specifying General Ledger Details Specify the customer accounts which are involved in the inter branch transaction in the respective branches To maintain customer accounts for the branch pair specified the fo
212. ll parameters that you define subsequently will only apply to the module that you specify You can enter a description of the module for which you are maintaining purge details For purging limits history which is Liability Lines and Lines Utilization history you must specify LM as the module code Limits history data is purged for the current branch only me ORACLE 26 2 1 2 Specifying Nature of Data to be Purged You can opt to purge contracts of the module you specified along the following criteria You may either choose to purge any of the following e Liquidated contracts e Closed applicable only to the BC and LC modules e Reversed contracts When you run the purge process only those contracts that are in the status that you specified will be purged That is only contracts in the module you specified that are liquidated closed and or reversed depending on your specification will be purged from the system Similarly if you want to purge e Exchange rates from the Currency module you should choose the None option e Data from the Reconciliation module you should choose any of the following options depending on the data that you want to purge The options available are gt System Date Relative gt Match Relative gt Closed Match gt Closed External Statement Retention Period The retention period as the term suggests is the period for which data is stored in the system For each module in Orac
213. llowing parameters should be maintained Inter Bank Currency For each branch you have the option of specifying whether the inter branch entries must be posted in the transaction currency or the settlement account currency For the booking branch if the Inter branch Transaction Currency option specified is Transaction Currency inter branch entries are posted in the transaction currency only if e The local currency of both branches involved in the transaction is the same e One of the accounts in the entries belongs to the booking branch Due To Branch 2 This field identifies the customer account maintained in Branch 1 into which the credit accounting entry is passed To specify the customer account select the appropriate account from the picklist of all the customer accounts maintained at Branch 1 Due From Branch 2 This field identifies the customer account maintained in Branch 1 into which a debit entry will be passed Due to Branch 1 This identifies the customer account maintained at Branch 2 into which a credit entry will be passed Due From Branch 1 This account identifies the customer account maintained at Branch 2 into which a debit entry will be passed System uses the customer accounts specified in this screen and determines the settlement route for a transaction between two different branches of your bank 6 5 Inter Branch Transactions through Customer Accounts with Currency An Example Assume that Fri
214. ly e Weekly e Daily If you indicate that the statement generation frequency is weekly you should also indicate the day of the week on which the account statement is due Similarly for a monthly statement you should indicate the day of the month To specify the frequency for a monthly statement you can specify a number between 1 and 31 corresponding to the system date If you set the statement date to 30 then account statements will be generated on e The last working day for months with lt 30 days e For months with 30 days on the 30th if 30th is a holiday on the next working day If you set the statement date to 31 then account statements will be generated on e The 31st for month with 31 days if 31st is a holiday on the next working day e The last working day for months lt 31 days For all other cycles account statement would be generated on the last day of that cycle 30 2 2 Maintaining Cheque Book Preferences Oracle FLEXCUBE provides you with the facility to automatically trigger the reorder of Cheque Books for all accounts reporting to a specific account class However you have the option of changing your preferences at the account level also To facilitate automatic reordering of Cheque Books you have to maintain the following details Cheque Book To indicate that automatic reordering of cheque books should be allowed and for specifying the details for the same you have to check this option If not selec
215. mask that you specify in the Branch Parameters screen Therefore you have to first define IBAN masks The IBAN Mask Since IBANs should be maintained in a particular format you should first define the format in which the IBAN should be captured You should also indicate the format in which the bank code of the bank in which the account resides should be maintained The maximum length of an IBAN should be 34 characters The IBANK Mask should be a combination of the following parameters An ISO Country Code which has a maximum length of two characters The identifier that you can use to indicate the country code is DD The identifier will be replaced by the actual country code while defining the account number For instance you will replace DD with PL for Poland US for the United States and so on A Check Digit Number calculated according to an ISO Standard algorithm using the Country Code Bank Code and Account Number combination Since this is a two digit number you can use the identifier CC to specify this algorithm The system arrives at and replaces this identifier with the actual check digit based on the Country Code Bank Code and Account Number combination The Bank Code of the bank where the IBAN resides This code is assigned to the respective Bank by its national bank There are no individual restrictions on the length of Bank Code and Account Number However the combined length of the Bank Code and Account Number should not exc
216. ment debits The GL entries for all inter branch transactions are recorded in this account At the end of every business day the balance in this account across all the branches in the bank should be zero For the transactions done against accounts of other branches contra entries are posted against this GL For the transactions done on accounts of other branches contra Inter branch entries are generated automatically by FLEXCUBE during End of Day and posted against this GL 2 34 Future Dated Bridge GL CR Specify the GL code for the future dated bridge credit GL All the bridging credit entries for future dated transactions from the transaction date to the value date will be recorded in this account Future Dated Bridge GL DR Specify the GL code for the future dated bridge debit GL All the bridging debit entries for future dated transactions from the transaction date to the value date will be recorded in this account Position Currency Select the appropriate position currency from the drop down list The position currency is used for defining the position in foreign exchange at the bank level You can select one of the following options e Destination currency e Source currency Withholding Tax GL 1 Specify the code for withholding tax GL 1 The GL entries for tax 1 deducted at source TDS for CASA will be recorded in this GL This is a liability type GL Withholding Tax GL 2 Specify the code for withholding tax GL 2
217. messages generated for the accounts under the respective classes You can choose the appropriate values applicable e Previous MT940 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 940 in the current balance report e Previous MT941 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 941 in the current balance report e Previous MT950 This indicates all transactions posted and authorized since the issue of a previous MT 950 in the current balance report You can synchronize the time instance by hours for generation of balance messages by clicking the Times button 31 ORACLE F Message Generation Time Web Page Dialog Message Generation Time O Message Generation Time This screen is employed to indicate the the time instance in hours for the generation of the balance reports Message Generation Time Specify the timing for generation of the MT 941 MT942 messages You can specify the time interval in hours only A new message type is created for the balance report process which can be run as part of a scheduled task This message type is ACST_BALANCE and ACST_INT_DTL 30 2 16 Specifying Regulation D Applicability for Account Class For an account class you can define whether the Regulation D limits are applicable and the period over which the limits would be applicable In the Account Class Maintenance screen click the REG
218. mits When you have specified these limits the system automatically validates the amount with each transaction for the currency pair product module and branch combination and accordingly if the limits are exceeded enforces the manual entry of exchange rates In case the limit between ccy1 and ccy2 is given in ccy2 the system will automatically convert the transaction amount to an amount in ccy2 using standard mid rate and check against the limit amount whether or not manual entry of exchange rates is required You can invoke the Product Limits Maintenance screen by typing CSDPXMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button teal ORACLE The screen appears as shown below a Product Limits Maintenance Web Page Dialog q 2 x Branch Code 044 Module Code FT Product Code ALL Currency1 AAA Currency2 CHF Limit Details F I Rate Code Limit Currency Limit Amount E I CASH CHF 1 000 00 b Input By PRAGNYA Date Time 7 3 2000 17 08 24 Modification Number 3 Authorized By Date Time Branch Code You must specify the branch for which the limit amount will be applicable You can specify that the limits must be applicable for all branches Module Code You must specify the module for which the limit amount will be applicable You can indicate that these limits must be applicable for both the Data Entry DE and Funds Transfer
219. mount is rounded down based on the number of decimals and the nearest rounding unit a ORACLE 8 2 1 2 Example Amount before Rounding Method No of Rounding Amount after Rounding Decimals Unit Rounding 1234 678 Truncate 2 1234 67 1234 678 Round up to the nearest 2 01 1234 68 rounding unit 1234 678 Round down to the 2 01 1234 67 nearest rounding unit Unit If you have selected Round Up or Round Down in the Rule field you need to indicate the nearest unit to which the rounding should take place The number of units specified here should not be greater than the number of decimals allowed for the currency Example The decimal points specified for currency A is 2 Rounding unit is 05 Amount for transaction is USD 100 326 which will be rounded off depending upon the decimals specified and the rounding rule and rounding unit For Rounding Rule Up the amount available for transaction would be USD 100 35 For rounding rule Down the transaction amount would have been rounded down to 100 30 If the rounding rule was specified as truncate then the amount would have rounded off to 100 32 simply knock off all decimal points beyond the stated decimals places to be rounded off Thus whenever you specify a truncate option you need not state the Rounding unit Specifying Amount Format Mask Specify the format in which amounts in this currency are to be displayed f
220. n 3 It checks the maintenance for AL all modules ZALP all products combination If the third option is also not available the system displays an error message When a transaction exceeds the amount limit the system displays an override message while saving the transaction Maintaining Sequence Generation Format Every contract in Oracle FLEXCUBE is identified by a unique Contract Reference Number that is generated internally by the system You are not allowed to modify this number In addition a contract is also identified by a unique User Reference Number By default the Contract Reference Number will be taken as the User Reference Number But you have the option to change the User Ref Number Oracle FLEXCUBE also provides you the facility to generate the user reference number in a specific format To maintain a specific format you need to identify the various components that would be part of the user reference number including details such as the length order value etc of each component You can maintain a unique format through the Sequence Generation Input screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSDSEQGN in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button ad ORACLE The screen appears as shown below a Sequence Generation Input Web Page Dialog B 2x Sequence Code TESTO6 Branch Code OAC Module Code AL Reset Frequency Mone E IF Range From
221. n cases where the main line is changed to a sub line the utilization is transferred from the old main line to the new main line and the effect cascades to the ultimate parent line But existing records are not changed or updated gt Existing data will not reflect the change in the liability number for a customer e Revaluation has no effect on the limits history data e Limits history is not maintained country wise The data is archived during the EOD processing The history data is not updated for holidays If there is no change for a liability limit line data is not archived for that day The example below illustrates the functionality All the Currencies are in USD Customer Liability Liability Amount Cust1 Cust1 100000 2 23 Customer Liability Liability Amount Account Credit Line Limit Amount Acct Line 1 60000 Acct2 Line 2 40000 Case On Day 1 which is 1 Jan 2001 No Transactions have been processed Therefore no data is stored in any of the history tables Case Il On Day 2 which is the 3 of Jan 2001 29 Jan 2001 was a holiday no transactions have been processed in the System Therefore data is not stored in any of the limits history tables Case Ill On Day 3 which is The 4th of Jan 2001 transactions have been processed in the System The data in the History tables after the EOD will be as follows
222. n maintain internal accounts for branches involved in inter branch transactions Chapter 7 Currency Maintenance explains the process of maintaining currencies in the system with all necessary static attributes Chapter 8 Maintaining Currency Denomination explains the maintenance of standard currency denominations for each currency Chapter 9 Expressing Amounts in Words describes the details of maintaining amounts in words Chapter 10 Defining Currency Pairs explains the maintenance of static attributes for currency pairs for which exchange rate quotes are available Chapter 11 Maintaining Exchange Rates explains the maintenance of exchange rates used to buy and sell currencies one for another Chapter 12 Maintaining Currency Spread for a Customer explains the maintenance of currency spread and margin details for a customer Chapter 13 Defining Currency Rate Types explains the maintenance of different types of currency rates applicable to the different transaction categories in your bank Chapter 14 Maintaining Floating Rates explains the maintenance of floating rates for a currency Chapter 15 Period Code Maintenance explains the maintenance of financial periods into which each financial cycle is to be divided Chapter 16 Status Code Maintenance explains the maintenance of codes that you can assign to the different statuses that a contract or a customer account can attain Chapter 17 Transaction Code Maintenance explains the maintenance
223. n specific to a particular field by placing the cursor on the relevant field and striking lt F1 gt on the keyboard 1 1 1 Audience This manual is intended for the following User User Roles Role Function Back office clerk Input functions for contracts Back office managers officers Authorization functions Product Managers Product definition and authorization End of day operators Processing during end of day beginning of day Financial Controller Product Generation of reports Managers 1 1 2 Organization The manual is organized in the following manner Chapter 1 About this Manual gives a brief introduction of the module the audience it addresses and the organization of the various chapters It also includes the list of related documents to be referred if any and the conventions used in the document Chapter 2 Bank Parameters explains the maintenance of various basic details about your bank Chapter 3 Dealer Maintenance explains how you can capture profiles of dealers involved in buying and selling of foreign exchange Chapter 4 Branch Parameters explains the process of creating and maintaining branches of your bank with all necessary details Chapter 5 System Dates Maintenance explains how you can maintain system dates for the branches of your bank Chapter 6 Accounts for Inter Branch Transactions explains how you ca
224. n the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Z Tiered Customer Spread Maintenance Webpage Dialog Branch Code BCM Customer BCM001270 Currency INR Product ALL Effective Date 11 30 2007 Spread Maintenance Tenor From Tenor To Spread Ooo o O Maker FCJ Date Time 11 30 2007 16 08 35 Mod No E Authorized XI Checker FCJ Date Time 11 30 2007 16 08 35 E Open I ORACLE In this screen you can maintain the following parameters Branch Code Specify the branch code of the branch for which the spread is applicable The system displays All by default Customer Specify the customer Id for which the spread is applicable Currency Specify the currency in which the spread is applicable Product Specify the product for which the spread is applicable Effective Date Specify the date from which the customer spread is effective Tenor From Specify the tenor from when the spread is applicable Tenor To Specify the tenor up to when the spread is applicable Spread Specify the customer spread for the mentioned tenor Customer spread can be in negative figures also We ORACLE 20 Tiered Product Spread Maintenance 20 1 Introduction In the Tiered Product Spread Maintenance screen you can capture tenor wise product spread along with the details like branch currency product code tenor and so on Tenor based interest rates w
225. nce This default is arrived at by using the base exchange rate with respect to the local currency and applying the suitable spreads The default exchange rates are derived as follows Nature of Transaction Default Exchange Rate Formula 7 4 Nature of Transaction Default Exchange Rate Formula Buy Foreign Currency BR A Sell Foreign Currency BR A Buy Local Currency BR B Sell Local Currency BR B In the above table e BR Base Rate e A Spread to use to compute LCY equivalent e B Spread to use to compute target currency equivalent To invoke the screen type STDTRRAT in the field at the top right corner of the application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button FCCORE Transaction Rate Cross Reference Save Transaction Mnemonic Transaction Type Literal Base Rate to Use Spread to use compute LCY Equivalent Spread to use compute target CCY Equivalent Maker Date Time Checker Date Time Mod No Record Status Authorization Status Specify the following details Transaction Mnemonic Specify the transaction mnemonic You can select the appropriate transaction mnemonic from the option list The conversion rates will be defined for the selected transaction mnemonic 7 5 Transaction Type Literal Select the transaction type literal from the drop down list This is the mode in which the transaction will be carried out The options
226. nd end dates coincide with the last date of the financial cycle Into this one day period you can post the accumulated profits and loss for the financial cycle general reserves and statutory reserves for the current year after paying off the dividends After this one day period is closed the status of the financial cycle in the made by field status is displayed as closed With this the financial year stands closed and no adjustments can be posted to it Closure of a period financial cycle can be invoked through the General Ledger Core Services module The branches of the bank should close this period financial cycle moss ORACLE 17 Status Code Maintenance 17 1 Introduction Loans and bills which are past their due maturity date of installment re payment but remain unpaid are defaulted contracts In the Oracle FLEXCUBE system these defaulted contracts can be assigned to different statuses based on the number of days for which the contract is outstanding Each status can be assigned a code For instance you can define a status code PDO to represent past due obligation and specify a period of 15 days after which an outstanding contract should be marked as PDO If they are due for more than 60 days you could assign a doubtful status sub standard if due for 6 months and so on Contracts for which no installments are due or which are regularly paid on their due dates are assigned the status Active by
227. nds scheduled to be released on the current date today OR e The total uncollected funds available against the account subject to the Uncollected Funds Limit You can specify your preference by choosing any of the following options e Uncollected Funds If you select this option an amount up to or less than the uncollected funds limit defined for the account is allowed to be withdrawn on a given business day e Uncollected Funds Available Same Day If you select this option the funds allowed to be withdrawn against uncollected funds on a given business day are the funds scheduled to be released on the current date today Deferred Statement Generation Check this option to stop the automatic account statement generation at end of day If this option is checked then the account statement generation will be deferred to whenever you initiate action for executing Batch Operations for statement generation You can do this through the Branch Statement Status Change screen Enterprise GL Check this option if this branch needs to have an enterprise GL hand off Once checked the system will identify the said branch for creating an ASCII hand off file containing the relevant accounting entries to be sent to the external enterprise GL Minor Age Limit Specify the minimum age limit which varies from nation to nation If not specified then the system would default it to 18 during save Notification Period Specify the intimation days
228. nent value Further if you wish to include a manipulated column value in sequence generation you will need to include SUBSTR as well in the column name For eg to include only the first four characters of the product group associated with the product code involved in a contract you will specify the following in the Component Column field SUBSTR PRODUCT_GROUP 1 4 oe ORACLE You need to mention the table name also if the component type is dynamic The following table names are available in the option list provided e DUAL e STTM_BANK e STTM_BRANCH e CSTM_PRODUCT For our example the table name would be CSTM_PRODUCT Component Where Clause The condition or the where clause of the SQL code is specified here In the example discussed above the system will pick up the appropriate product group depending on the product code involved in the contract being processed You can specify the following where clause as an extension of the SQL statement specified earlier WHERE PRODUCT_CODE SUBSTR P_CRN 4 4 Click add icon to define each subsequent component in the format Use the navigating icons to move between the various components of a sequence format oe ORACLE 9 1 9 2 9 Maintaining Currency Denomination Introduction In the Data Entry module you can specify a break up of a transaction amount for Teller transactions by denomination The system also maintains a break up of the till balances by de
229. nerated You can run Settlement Messages function as part of EOD operations from the Application Browser to automatically generate settlement messages for contracts marked out for automatic liquidation The settlement day specification for a currency will determine the contracts that are picked up for settlement message generation Cut off Time The Currency Cut off time refers to the time by which all transactions involving a currency should be generated For a currency you can indicate the cut off hour and minute This time should be expressed in the local time of the bank The maintenance of a cut off time for a currency has particular reference to outgoing funds transfers involving it Holidays are handled based on the currency holiday preferences specified for your bank Cut off days You can also specify the cut off days and time for payment transactions involving the currency Example The value date of a funds transfer transaction incoming payment involving USD is 3 June 2001 The number of cut off days specified for the currency is 2 This means that the payment must be received on or before 1 June 2001 Ifthe payment is received on 1 June it must be received before the cut off time specified for USD If the USD cut off time is 1200 hrs then if the payment is received on 1 June 2001 it must be received before 1200 hrs os ORACLE The cut off time in hours and minutes that you maintain to be applicable for paym
230. ng e Customer Accounts e General Ledgers If you select Customer Accounts as an inter branch entity you can specify the currency and the actual customer accounts involved in an inter branch transaction between two branches of your bank If the inter branch entity is specified as General Ledgers you need to specify the internal accounts that would be involved in a transaction between two different branches of your bank Auto rollover of blocked TD Check this box to allow auto rollover for linked TD accounts 2 21 This indicates whether or not the Term Deposit Account should be closed on the maturity date If the linked TD account closes on maturity then it should be marked for rollover with rollover type as principal and interest The maturity date is re computed based on the existing tenor of the TD New maturity date will be maturity date tenor maturity date interest start date Online GL Updates The update of GL balances can take place either on line or during End of Day For an on line update select this checkbox Auto Generate CIF Numbers This indicates whether or not the CIF should be generated automatically Check this box to indicate the CIF number needs to be generated automatically Copy Exchange Rates to Branches Exchange rates are maintained for a currency pair and are used to calculate the equivalent of one currency against the other These exchange rates can be maintained in each branch or at the
231. ng quoted against the other Rate Type This is the rate type 32 11 ORACLE Date The effective date of the rates applied Mid Rate This is the mid rate used for conversion Buy Rate This is the buy rate used for conversion Sale Rate This is the sell rate used for conversion 32 7 Account Closing Confirmation This report gives details about closing confirmation of an account in Account Closing Confirmation screen To invoke this screen type CSRPACCC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Acc ount Closing Confirmation Web Page Dialog Customer Report 32 7 1 Contents of Report The contents of account closing confirmation have been discussed under the following heads Header The Header carries the title of the report information on the branch code the ID of the user who generated the report the date and time at which it was generated the modules covered in the report and customer number of the account holder for whom the report is being generated Body You can find the following details in the body of the report Client Number The account number of the client 32 12 ORACLE 32 8 Activity Journal Report This report gives details about activity journal in Core Activity Journal screen To invoke this screen type CSRPACTJ in the field at the top right corner of the Appl
232. nge Rate Limits Click PC button in the Currency Definition screen to invoke Limits screen Limits Web Page Dialog x Ei Auto Exchange Rate Credit Limit 23 45 Debit Limit 12 56 You can specify the credit limit and the debit limit for the exchange rate in this screen PR ORACLE 8 2 3 Mapping Currency to Country Click Currency Country Mapping button in the Currency Definition screen to invoke Clearing Zones Country Codes for Currency screen The screen appears as shown below A Clearing Zone Country Codes for the currency Web Page Dialog 7 wlx Currency Code ADF Austrian Schilling Country Code and Description F O Country Code Country Description a m aus Australia M NRR NORWAY You can map a currency code to a country in this screen 8 2 4 Specifying User Defined Fields You can associate values to all the User Defined fields created and attached to the Currency Definition Screen You can view the list of User Defined fields associated by clicking the Fields button omy ORACLE The screen appears as shown below User Defined Fields Web Page Dialog Fields plx I Field Name Value a You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the Value column For more details on how to create user Defined fields refer chapter Creating custom fields in Oracle FLEXCUBE in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modul
233. nomination In the Currency Denomination screen you maintain the standard currency denominations for each currency that your bank deals with You can invoke this screen by typing CYDCDENO in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Currency Denomination Detailed Web Page Dialog E 2 x 4 Currency EUR EURO Currency Denomination Detail T Denomination Code Description Value Sequence Number Type z In E100 100 Euros 100 1 NOTE 7 D E50 50 Euros 50 2INOTE F M E20 20Euros 20 3 NOTE eo 10 Euros 10 4 NOTE mes 5 Euros S NOTE Ce 1 Euro 1 6 NOTE m c50 50 cent 7ICOIN C10 10 cent 1 BICOIN a y ES Fields Date Time 12 28 1999 16 35 2 Modification Number 1 open Authorized By SCRIP date 2 9 7 Ei Authorized Maintaining Currency Denomination Details To maintain the denominations of a currency you need to specify the following e The code of the currency for which you are defining denominations e A unique code to identify each denomination of the currency For example you can assign D1 D10 D50 for USD 1 10 50 e A description of the denomination unit e The denomination type coin or note e The value of the denomination in relation to one unit of the currency It could be a fraction for coins a ORACLE Example For the currency USD you can maintain the denominations as follows
234. number of days of credit debit balance during the period e Credit and debit days The number of days the account was in credit debit balance in the period e Credit and Debit Turnover The credit debit turnover for the period e Excess days in debit balance The number of days in a month when the account exceeded the overdraft limits e Overdraft Limit This is computed by summing the temporary overdraft limit and the sub limit of the account For each month this would represent the limit on the last date of the month e Credit grade of the Customer 9 ORACLE This would be the prevalent rating on the last day of the period For the current period this information is provided up to the previous working day To enable printing of this information for all accounts using an account class you must enable the Account Statistics option in the Account Class Maintenance For each account class for which account statistics has been enabled an accounting End of Day EOD process updates the statistics table both period wise and according to financial years The book dated balances are used for computation of statistics and the balances are maintained according to accounting periods For information about viewing the period wise account statistics refer the section Querying on Account Statistics found earlier in this chapter Status Change Automatic If you check this option the status of the account will be changed automat
235. nversion Transaction Code Payment Messages Floating Rate I Generate 103 Proceed without maintaining Deferred Statement Y float rate Status v JF Generate 103 Install Default Bank Operation CRED z Code Branch Code for Clearing Sector Code Clearing Through Branch Routing No AMB Loan Direct Debit Generation Days Preferences SWIFT Address Account Mask CIF Range GI Functions Tax Branch Currency UDF Date Time 7 Modification Number 3 Date Time 7 8 4 2 1 Indicating Euro Redenomination General Ledger Conversion GL The conversion GL that you specify will be identified as the common Suspense GL for all balance conversions while re denominating the currency of an account either for specific customers or for generic conversions Transaction Code In addition to the conversion GL you have to indicate a Transaction Code which identifies conversion related entries oe ORACLE 8 4 3 Implications of Currency Redenomination In the IC Product Accounting Role Definition screen For the purpose of currency conversion an accounting role called Acquired is available End of day processes Maintaining a Conversion GL and Transaction Code simplifies the End of day process Basically two important things happen when the End of day processes are run Firstly interest is liquidated to the Acquired Interest GL and secondly all balances will be reduced to zero When you run the Beginning of day process
236. o EUR depending on the settlement account s maintained Similarly components in Euro can either be settled in EUR or in an In currency In the settlement messages that are generated MT 100 MT202 the settlement amount would be reported in the Settlement Account Currency However you can opt to additionally furnish the value of the component in Euro Related Information ERI currency You have to manually specify the settlement amount value in the ERI currency in the Settlement Message Details screen PH ORACLE When generating the message towards settlement MT100 MT202 the system ensures that the value you specify as the ERI Amount conforms to the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI Currency in the Currency Definition screen That is the system computes the ERI equivalent of the settling amount using the pegged rates and compares the same against the ERI amount input by the user If the difference is within the tolerance limits defined for the ERI currency the user specified amount is used If the user specified ERI amount breaches the Tolerance Limit defined for the ERI currency the system calculates and reports the ERI Amount on the basis of the exchange rate defined for the settlement currency vis a vis the ERI currency The following example illustrates the application of the Tolerance Limit Example In the SWIFT messages MT 100 and MT 202 that are generated towards settlement the value of the component can be r
237. o Deposits Auto deposits are the linked deposit accounts to the savings accounts These accounts are created once the threshold balance exceeds in the customer accounts You can maintain these accounts using Auto Deposits screen Click the button Auto Deposit in the Account Class Maintenance screen to invoke it Auto deposits Web Page Dialog x Account Class Def Rate Code Transaction Code Def Rate Type d z Currency Sweep Mode Automatic Minimum Required Balance Break Method FIFO z Cluster MECN F Provide Interest On Broken TT Break Deposits First Deposit You have to specify the following fields in this screen Account Class Specify the deposit type of account class for the auto deposit account a ORACLE Transaction Code Specify the transaction code DPN New deposit account for the book event to trigger at the time of creation of auto deposit account Currency Specify the currency in which the deposit account has to created Minimum Required Balance Specify the balance that is required to be maintained at the linked savings account If any balance exists beyond this balance in the account then the system creates an auto deposit account as part of batch process Cluster ID Specify a valid cluster ID you need to link to deposit account class You can link cluster ID only for term deposits Example You specified the multiple factor as 50 and the minimum required b
238. o give credit facility to this account for the specified country Select the Limit currency that should be used for defining the credit limit for this country from the option list Overall Limit This is the maximum credit exposure that a bank is willing to take for a country That is the sum of all utilization s under this country liability cannot exceed the amount specified here ee ORACLE Blacklisted Further in the Country Name Maintenance screen you can black list a country for further usage You are not allowed to deal in countries that are blacklisted You can only deal with countries that are not blacklisted IBAN Mandatory for Payment Messages If this is checked it indicates that for every payment message an IBAN is mandatory This is automatically checked if you have checked the EU Member box If this option is unchecked for a country the system will not process the outgoing payments wherein the ordering customer or the beneficiary customer belongs to that country EU Member This indicates whether the country is recognized by Swift as a part of the Intra European countries If you check this flag the instructed amount field should be mandatory in the generated 103 103 and 102 messages The instructed amount field is mandatory in the incoming messages Restricted Check this box to indicate that the country as restricted While saving the export bill contract if the country of the drawee is restric
239. ocessing Fora specific customer product and a currency you can specify a certain number of days before which a transaction involving the combination must be received as well as a cut off time before which transactions must be received These parameters are known as currency cut off parameters and you maintain these parameters in the Value Dated Spread maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing FTDVDSPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Value Date Spread Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x Value Date Spread Customer Identification PAY101PAV Currency Code USD Customer Name PA Product Code FT Description INTERNAL N Description U S DOLLAR Spread Details Cut Off Details Debit Value Date Spread 5 Days Credit Value Date Spread 5 Cut Off Time HR Minutes Z Fields Input By DEEPA Date Time 47 02 Modification Number 1 Iv Open Authorized By DEEPA Date Time 47 03 gd Authorized In this screen you can maintain the cut off time cut off days and the value spreads to be applicable for e Each customer for a product and currency combination e All customers for each product and currency combination These currency cut off parameters are validated in respect of a funds transfer transaction only if currency cut off checks are specified as applicable in the product preferences for the product involving the transaction Fo
240. ode instance for which the CIF mask is required Select a node from the option list provided Customer Identification File Mask This indicates the CIF mask for the corresponding instance node Select a CIF mask from the option list provided Autogenerate Customer Identification File Number This indicates whether or not the CIF should be generated automatically Check this box to indicate the CIF number needs to be generated automatically Allow Inventory Tracking You can use this check box to allow disallow inventory management and tracking To use inventory management module check this box If inventory tracking is allowed then Cheque Numbering Scheme should be left blank null For more details on Inventory Tracking refer the Instruments Inventory Tracking module manual Maintaining Bank Parameters for FC Core You can maintain general information about the bank and related parameters using FCCORE Bank Parameters Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type STDFCBNK in the field at the top right corner of the application toolbar and click the adjoining arrow button FCCORE Bank Parameters Maintenance Bank Code Bank Short Name ISO Code Bank Name Bank Identifer Clearing Bank Code N GL Details other Details Address 1 Last Process Date Address 2 Next Processing Date Address 3 STL Process Date City TD Process Date State Process Date Zip GL Process Date Country z3 C
241. odified Maintenance Records You can enable tanking of the creation and modification of maintenance records by selecting the Tanking Required option provided at the function Id level You need to enable the Tanking Required option in RAD tool as well You can enable Tanking Required option for individual function Ids in Function Description Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing SMDFNDSC in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button A Function Description Maintenance Webpage Dialog Function Identification STDCIF Name Module List CO Z Type Form Custom Function ID Menu Head MODULE Type String Maintenance M Available Tanking Required Automatic End Of Day aware Log Event Customer Access Auto Autho Head Office Function Duplicate task check Main Control String for functions and reports Duplicate Check Fields 1of 1 Function Description m Language Code Main Menu Sub Menu 1 Sub Menu 2 Balloon Help Description Field Properties Maker Date Time Mod No WB Authorized Checker Date Time E open To enable tanking of maintenance records for a function Id you need to select the function Id in this screen and then select the Tanking Required checkbox For more details on this screen re
242. of Day Branch awaiting date change The values are updated by EOC process External Value Specify the name of the branch as maintained in an external system This value can be used to interface with the external system Cutoff Offset Time When defining a currency you can indicate a cut off time for the currency If your bank operates in branches located in different time zones the cut off time maintained for the bank will not be applicable across branches Therefore you can set up an offset time for your branch based on the cut off time set for the bank You can specify an offset time for your branch in the Branch Parameters screen Hours amp Minutes The offset time is expressed in hours and minutes The time you specify here is added or subtracted from the cut off time maintained for the bank This depends on the time difference between your branch and the Head Office Local Parameters Clearing Branch This indicates the clearing branch code Maintaining Financial Details for Branch You can specify the details regarding suspense GLs Financial cycle preference for floating rate message generation 103 103 for the branch in this screen The screen appears as shown below 4 8 FCCORE Branch Parameters Maintenance Branch Code Branch Name Branch Available Status General Details ENANEEREBENS Additional Details Suspense General Ledger Description Financial Cycle Description Current Cycle Descrip
243. ollateral Value e Limit Contribution e Issuer Exposure Amount Credit Lines In the Limits screen of the Limits Maintenance module the following fields will reflect the new values e Credit Line Currency e Tenor limits e Tenor utilization e All Related Amounts Customer Limits In the Customer Maintenance screen of the Core Services module the following fields will be updated at BOD e Limit Currency e Liability Risk Limit e Customer Risk Limit Note the following e Once the conversion process is complete the advices generated for your customer will carry the following information gt The Old Value gt The New Value gt And the Exchange Rate used for the conversion e As a consequence of currency re denomination you will not be able to pass entries where the value date falls before the currency conversion date ae ORACLE 8 4 4 Specifying Preferred ERI Currency for Counterparty For a counterparty and currency combination you can maintain a preferred ERI currency You can state this preference in the Settlement Instructions screen The implication During the transition period settlements of components in In currencies can be made either in the same currency or in the Euro EUR depending on the settlement account s maintained Similarly components in Euro can either be settled in EUR or in an In currency In the settlement messages that are generated MT 100 MT202 the settlement amoun
244. om the option list provided Accounting Head Select the GL accounting head to be used for role to head mapping from the option list provided 4 36 You can add more rows to accounting role and heads by clicking the plus icon provided You can also delete a row from this table by selecting the required row and clicking the minus icon The accounting roles and heads maintained here will override the default role head mapping maintained for the product 4 5 1 Viewing Accounting Role to Head Mapping Details You can view the details related to accounting roles and heads for a branch in Branch Level Role to Head Mapping Summary screen You can invoke this screen by typing CSSACRHM in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button e Branch level Role To Head Mapping Summary Webpage Dialog Authorization Status Record Status Branch Code Product Code Status Q Search Advanced Search Records per page 15 3 x Lock 1 of 1 Authorization Status Record Status Branch Code The following details get displayed in this screen e Authorization status e Record status e Branch code e Product code e Status code 4 37 5 System Dates Maintenance 5 1 Introduction In the System Dates Maintenance screen you maintain the system dates for your branch for instance the business date for your branch which is the booking date for all
245. on cccesccescesecesecsseeneeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaecnsecnaecesecaecaaeeaaeeaeees 26 30 2 14 Maintaining Transaction Restrictions for Account Class scccscesseesseeeeeeeeeeeesecesecnsecseceeeaeeneeees 29 30 2 15 Maintaining Details of Account Statements Generation sseseeeseesseseeeesereseereersererrerrrererrrreerreen 30 30 2 16 Specifying Regulation D Applicability for Account CLASS ssssseesseseeseseeseeseeseeeneesereenerrererrsrresesreens 32 30 2 17 Assigning Preferred Branches Currencies and CUStomeTS ssseseseeseeseesrseeeerererrerrrrrerrsrreserreees 33 30 2 18 Maintaining Branch Preference sscccsccccssecesneeenseceuneeesecesncecsceceneeeasecseneeeaueceeneeensecueceseneeceeneeenaees 34 30 2 19 Maintaining Currency Preferences ccccccccccccesccesscesscesecnsecusecaseesseeseeeeseseeeeeeeseceseesecaeeaeeaeeaeeeneees 34 30 2 20 Maintaining Customer Preferences cccccccccccsscesscesecesecesecusecseeseeesseseeeeeeeeeceecesesnsecaesaeeaaeenaeeneees 35 30 2 21 Maintaining Notice Preferences ccccccccecceesceecesscesecesecusecnsecaeeesseeseeeseeeeeseeeesesesecsecaesaecaeeaeeeneees 37 30 2 22 Account Classes for Time Deposit ACCOUNES 1cccsceesseeeceeeceeeeeeecesecusecuaecauecaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeseaess 39 30 2 23 Specifying Dual Currency Deposits Details ccccccccesscesecesecesecusecuseeseeeseeeeceseceseeneeeeaecnsesnaecnaeenes 4 31 ANTI MONEY LAUNDERING REPORTING essseeseseseeeeseroesesesecoeroso
246. on 2 8 A Batch Restriction Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2x Bi User Identification AMIT2 User Name AMIT2 Branch Code CHO Branch Name BANK OF INDIA Module Code PC Module Description Local Payments Allocated Batch Number Range T Start Number End Number z m 45 46 Z zi Fields Modification Number 1 open I Authorized Specify the following details in this screen e The User Profile for which the restrictions are being maintained A list of all the User Profiles with access rights to the DE and PC modules is displayed in the option list You can select the appropriate e The branch of your bank for which the restrictions will be made applicable You can either choose a specific branch or make the restriction applicable to All the branches of your bank e The module for which you are maintaining the Allocated Batch Number Range This can either be PC or DE e The batch number range which is indicated in terms of Start and End numbers The range that you specify is allocated to the user For distinct numbers the start number and end number of the range will be the same white processing DE and PC transactions the batch number specified by the user is validated against the allotted range If the validation fails an error message is displayed These validations are made applicable even during the Batch Upload operations for the following functions 1 Journal Online Single Entry 2
247. on Number Inflow This is the inflow amount Outflow This is the outflow amount Balance This is the available balance Currency This is the currency of the account 32 9 ORACLE Customer This is the name of the customer Account This is the account number of the customer Account Class This is the account class Opening This is the opening balance of the account 32 5Current Rates Report This report gives details on rates for currency pairs You can invoke the screen by typing CYRTCURR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button currency Rates Webpage Dialog Me zj Selection All Currency Pairs Selected Currency Pair Currency choice Currency 1 ze Specify the following details Selection Indicate whether the report should be generated for all currency pairs or for a given currency pair Currency 1 If you have chosen Selected Currency Pair then specify the first currency that forms a pair The adjoining option list displays all valid currency codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Currency 2 If you have chosen Selected Currency Pair then specify the second currency that forms the pair The adjoining option list displays all valid currency codes maintained in the system You can select the appropriate one Click OK to generate the report 32 10 OR
248. option for currency in the Currency Definition gt For the product used by the transaction in the Product Preferences e The system is also capable of processing incoming MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format During the upload process the system considers an MT 103 payment message to be of MT 103 Format based on the presence of the STP code in the 119 field Field 119 is present in the third block of the message i e 3 119 STP Default Bank Operation Code Select the default bank operation code from the option list Branch Code for Clearing Indicate the code that identifies your branch in the Clearing Network The code you specify for your branch should be the same as that defined in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen Clearing Through Branch If clearing transactions involving your branch are routed through another branch specify the Oracle FLEXCUBE branch code of that branch in this field 4 10 On the basis of the Routing Number Mask defined for your bank and your specifications in this screen Oracle FLEXCUBE automatically generates the Routing Number for clearing transactions involving your branch in the Routing Number field Loan Direct Debit Generation Days Loan DD Generation days specifies the number of days before the schedule payment date when a Direct Debit Contract is generated for the schedule due This is applicable only for Loan Contracts in the local currency In order to facilitate the processing of
249. or contracts in this currency Two options are available 999 999 999 9 999 999 99 The system defaults to the 999 999 999 format Euro Type When maintaining a currency in the Currency Definition screen you have to specify the type of the currency with relation to transition phase of the European Economic and Monetary Union EMU You can do this in the Euro Type field Your specifications in this field enable you to handle the first phase of the EMU which commenced on 01 January 1999 ae ORACLE 8 2 2 For more details on the manner in which Oracle FLEXCUBE handles the Euro refer the chapter Handling the Euro By choosing the appropriate option you can indicate if the currency is e The Euro e An In currency e An Out currency e Euro Closed National currencies of In countries are referred to as In currencies When maintaining other currencies you have to choose the Out Ccy option under Euro Type When the transition period ends the national currencies of the participating countries would cease to exist as valid legal tenders The Euro would be the only legal tender in the participating countries Consequently the Euro changes made to Oracle FLEXCUBE will no longer be required You can turn off the changes at the end of the transition period by 1 Closing all In currencies and 2 Choosing the Euro Closed option for the Euro Specifying Excha
250. ososstsosessososssoseeossossosesesose sssossssesssosevossossesessosts Ssv 17 1 I I INTRODUCTION e A E E E se E E 17 1 17 2 INVOKING STATUS MAINTENANCE SCREEN cssssssesececeesessssececececsesseaeeecececcessaneseeececsesesasseeeeeceesensaaseeeees 17 1 17 2 1 Maintaining Status Codes for COntracts cccccccccsccesscesscesecesecusecuseceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeaeenaeenaesnaeenae 17 2 18 TRANSACTION CODE MAINTENANCE ccccssssccssssscccssssccessscccesssccscssscccsssssccessaccscsscascsssecseessnes 18 1 1S1 INTRODUCTION inr e teesuaacecovneecameruiac a E 18 1 18 2 INVOKING TRANSACTION CODE SCREEN ccccsessscesececeesesceeceeccecsesseaececececeesaaeceeececsessasseseesesenensaaeeeeees 18 1 18 2 1 Maintaining Transaction Details ccccccessccessceessecesseeenseceeseeessecseneeeaseceeeeeesceceeeeeesaecseeeeenaecseneeenaeeees 18 2 18 2 2 Maintaining Country Name Details cccccccccceccceecceeecesecesecesecusecasecaceeseeeseeeseesseeseeeseeeecnseenaeenaeente 18 8 19 TIERED CUSTOMER SPREAD MAINTENANCE sseseesseseessecssooeessoceessecescsessscosessoceessessesoeessoseessese 19 1 19 1 INTRODUCTION minsanan a a a A A A A A ET 19 1 19 2 INVOKING TIERED CUSTOMER SPREAD MAINTENANCE SCREEN sssssssssccecsesssseceeececsesssssseccecceesesseaeeeeees 19 1 20 TIERED PRODUCT SPREAD MAINTENANCE 1 ccssscccssssccesssccccsssecccessccccscssccsessseccecssscecessececessnee 20 1 20 1 INTRODUCTION ceiien ar een a E E E EE E E
251. ou wish to create a two level GL structure for your bank You could define the first two characters of the GL to represent the category asset liability etc aa the next two characters nn to represent the first level GL and the next three characters nnn to represent the second level GL A GL based on the given structure would read as AS01001 where AS represents the GL category asset 01 represents the first level GL 001 represents the second level GL For creating this structure you would define your GL mask as aannnnn d D If you want to define your second level GL with a 4 digit numeric code instead of 3 other parameters remaining the same your mask would read as aannnnnn d D Indicating Year end Profit amp Loss General Ledger At the end of any financial year the balances in the income and expense accounts are posted by Oracle FLEXCUBE into a separate year end account for the purpose of consolidation of balances and turnovers This account is called the Year End profit and loss General Ledger Account You also specify year end profit and loss GL for each GL account you maintain in the Chart of Accounts screen The year end account specified at the bank level is the default year end profit and loss GL for all GL accounts maintained in the Chart of Accounts GL screen If you do not specify the account to which year end balances of a particular GL should be posted it will be posted to the bank s yea
252. ou would like to e Associate the customer category called Banks with NostroLCY e Disallow a customer called Midas Bank associated with the customer category called Banks from using the features of this class e Grant your customer Morgan Stanley linked to the customer category called Financial Institutions all rights associated with NostroLCY Procedure In the Selection Indicator field click on Allowed since your allowed list is smaller and therefore easier to indicate 1 Highlight and select the Customer Categories called Banks and Financial Institutions in the Available Categories list and click the adjoining arrow 2 Next highlight Financial Institutions and click adjoining arrow against Customers It will display the entire list of customer accounts maintained under the customer category Financial Institutions 3 Select Morgan Stanley It will be listed in the first row To allow this customer the parameters assigned to this account class check the small square box alongside 4 To add a row click the Add icon To delete an extra row click the Delete icon 5 To disallow Midas Bank click on Banks under available categories Click the adjoining arrow against Customers to display a list of all the customers under this category Select Midas Bank Since you would like to disallow this customer do not check the square box against it Check the square box to allow a customer the parameters assigned to this account class Leave
253. ount in both the settlement account currency and an ERI currency If you opt to furnish the ERI value of the amount you have to enter the following in the Settlement Details screen e The ERI currency e The ERI Amount mee ORACLE The screen appears as shown below Settlement Details Web Page Dialog we ke Reference Number CHOACC1001850008 Component BILL_AMOUNT Account Details Message Details Parties Parties Cover Parties Other Details Clearing Details Local Clearing IBAN Account Number Settlement Details p Component Currency Branch Account Account Currency Dic Exchange Rate Rate Code Spread Definition I BILL_AMOUNT USD CHO USD C X 3 USD CHO USD D z USD CHO USD D z USD CHO USD z 4 gt l Settlement Direction D Debit C Credit Component Description CLGSUSREC for PC The system defaults to the ERI currency specified for the customer and currency combination You can change the default ERI currency The ERI amount that you specify will be validated against the Tolerance Limit specified for the ERI currency 8 4 6 Settlements of Foreign Exchange Deals Oracle FLEXCUBE allows cross currency settlements of foreign exchange deals that involve an In currency You can settle the In currency leg in another In currency or in Euro Example Assume you enter into the following Foreign Exchange deal You sell 1 00 000 FRF against USD The scenario You spec
254. pending on the minimum amount required for liquidation the system would initiate a partial liquidation for loans but for retail teller contracts liquidation will be initiated only when full amount is available The following example illustrates the manner in which the system will use the sequence for allocation of funds Assume that you have maintained the following product sequence for funds allocation Sequence No Product 1 ADBN 2 LDBD aid ORACLE Sequence No Product 3 ABCD The liquidation schedule dates for the various loan contracts are as follows Contract Liq Schedule Dt Liqd Amt in USD LDBDOO1 1 January 2002 1000 LDBD002 1 January 2002 500 ADBNO01 2 January 2002 1000 ABCD001 2 January 2002 500 Further all contracts are marked for auto liquidation and the settlement account for all contracts is A1 The balance in account A1 as on 1 January 2002 is 500 USD Batch liquidation run as part of BOD EOD on 1 Jan Liquidation does not occur as the system detects insufficient funds in A1 only 400 USD The account is marked for receivable tracking and a block is placed on 400 USD A credit of 500 USD to A1 on 2 Jan The total amount blocked gets updated to 1000 USD Since we have two contracts involving the same product LDBD maturing on the same date funds will be allocated to the f
255. pplication Date and the Rate Serial as the latest available serial for the currency pair 1 The Rate Serial Number will be system generated However you can modify it if required This number takes into account the Rate Serial Number present in the Currency Rates History screen too The Rate Serial Number and the Rate Date will be displayed during authorization of the Rate in the Currency Authorization screen 12 1 1 Authorizing Exchange Rates Authorization of exchange rates is done from the Currency Exchange Rates input screen Details like old value new value for each field buy rate mid rate etc are displayed Click bA to authorize the record 12 1 2 Revising Exchange Rates For revising the exchange rates for your bank or the branches invoke the Currency Maintenance screen Click the currency pair whose exchange rate you want to revise and click amp on the toolbar or unlock in the Action menu Input modify the new rates for the pair 12 1 3 Viewing Exchange Rates You can view the exchange rates in the Currency Exchange Rates View screen You cannot input any values You also have the option of specifying whether you want to view authorized rates or the unauthorized rates for any currency pair You can invoke this screen by typing CYSRATES in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button i ORACLE The screen appears as shown below
256. preference Consider for Turnover Limit Check this box to indicate that all transactions posted under this code should be considered as part of the turnover limit processing Consider for Account activity If you check the field Consider for A C activity for a transaction code then any debit or credit posted under this code would reinstate the status of an account from dormant to active and accounting activity shall be considered Cheque Mandatory If for a transaction code you check Cheque Mandatory then for all transactions posted under this code transaction will take place through cheque For example Incoming Clearing transfer Cheque Mandatory should be checked only for SB cheque withdrawals and Cash Account Cheque withdrawals Example Transaction Code Maintenance Model Screen oe ORACLE TRANS DESCRIPTION SWIFT AVAIL 1 amp C I amp C UPDATE CHEQUE CODE CODE INFO TRANS TURN ACTIVITY MAND COUNT INCL STATUS A01 ACCOUNT TO MSC l Y Y Y Y ACCOUNT TRANSFER A02 ACCEPTANCE MSC Y Y Y Y B01 BANK WIRE TRF Y Y Y Y TRANSFER B02 BANK WIRE TRF TRF Y Y Y Y OWN ACC B03 BILL C A ENTRY BOE Y Y Y Y B04 BILLS BOE Y Y Y Y REDISCOUNTED C01 CANCEL CLEAN RTI Y Y Y Y CREDIT c02 CANCEL RTI Y Y Y Y GUARANTEE D01 DEBIT INTEREST MSC Y Y Y Y D02 DEMAND DRAFT MSC Y Y Y Y ISSUED E01 ENDORSED BOE Y Y Y Y BILLS SOLD F01 FEES ACCRUAL BRF Y Y Y Y
257. ptember 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 4 5 6 7 8 6 td 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 2 23 24 25 26 417 18 19 20 23 24 2 26 7 2 29 27 2x 30 31 24 25 26 2 30 1 October Hovember December zi Fields Modification Number 1 In this screen you can maintain a list of holidays for each of the currencies maintained in the currency screen for any year between 1 AD and 4000 AD an ORACLE 23 2 1 Steps to Define Currency Holidays To define currency holidays for a year for instance for 2000 you have to do the following Building the calendar for the year Step 1 Select new from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon A blank screen appears and the cursor moves to the field Year Step 2 Enter the year 2000 or move to the year 2000 using the arrows Step 3 To build the calendar for the year 2000 click on the Refresh button This button is called the refresh build up button because it builds the calendar for you Step 4 Select the currency for which you are defining holidays Please note e On invoking the calendar of any year you will notice that Saturdays and Sundays are marked as weekly holidays for the currency This is the default setting of the system e For identification the working days are marked in black and the holidays in red e All unauthorised records appear against a blue background On authorisation of that
258. ption for check status validation Reimburse Check this box to enable reimbursement Suppress SMS E Mail Check thix box to suppress SMS and email alerts Type of Arrear Select the type of arrear from the drop downlist Service Charge Code Select the appropriate service charge code from the option list Service Charge Description The system displays the description of the service charge Spend Class Select the appropriate spend class from the option list Internal Transaction Attributes Transaction Category Select the transaction category from the drop down list The options are as follows e Customer e Internal e System Transaction Mode Select the transaction mode from the drop down list The options are as follows e Cash e Clearing e Inquiry e Maintenance 7 3 e Transfer Channel Select the channel through which the transaction will take place from the drop down list The options are as follows e internet e ATM e Teller e Batch e POS e TBS Module Select the module in which the transaction will be included from the drop down list The options are as follows e CASA e Customer e GL e Inventory e Loans e Clearing e Deposits e Branch e APS Once you have captured the details save the maintenance Maintaining Transaction Rate Cross References You can arrive at the default exchange rates to be applied when posting transactions using transaction rate cross references maintena
259. r End Profit and Loss Customer Identification File Mask General Ledger General Ledger Mask Transaction Code Spread Spread Application General Ledger Purge Days Spool File Purge Days User Restriction For Batch Number SSO Enabled Interpay Lead days Auto Batch Cheque Numbering Details Scheme Checksum Algorithm Cheque Numbers Unique for Lodgement Numbers Unique Branch For Branch TRS Details Sort Code Suspense Account Account Number Payment and Collection Product Category TDS Computation Method i i Fields Account Mask Preferences Input By Date Time Modification number H open Authorized By Date Time w Authorized 2 1 4 1 Defining Format Masks A format mask is a structure that you can you can define for various elements that need to be entered in Oracle FLEXCUBE You can define format masks for the following elements e General Ledgers e Customer Identification File codes 2 5 e Customer account numbers Once defined you can modify the structure of a format mask only if no Customer or General Ledger Account has been opened using the mask Customer Account mask is defined from the Account Mask Button For more details on defining customer account mask refer the section titled Specifying Account Generation Parameters at Bank Level CIF Mask You can maintain a mask for generation of identification numbers CIF Number for customers of your bank During customer information maintenance the s
260. r Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing STDDEALR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Dealer Maintenance Web Page Dialog k 2 xI Dealer Id MIKE Dealer Name Mike Peter Input By SCRIPTS Jate e 12 2 Modification Number 1 open Authorized By SCRIPTS Date Time 12 28 1999 16 14 53 Wd Authorized The following parameters need to be maintained to define a dealer ID Dealer Id Enter a unique code to identify the dealer The identification code can have a maximum of six alphanumeric characters The dealer will be identified by this code for all transactions entered in Oracle FLEXCUBE You can also retrieve dealer wise information on the treasury deals entered into by your bank Dealer Name You can also enter a detailed name of the dealer The name of the dealer will be displayed whenever the dealer Id is used 2 1 4 Branch Parameters 4 1 Creating Branches In the Branch Parameters screen you create the various branches of your bank define their reporting hierarchy and maintain parameters such as their names their address of location SWIFT TELEX and HOST addresses In this screen you can do the following e Create the Regional Offices and branches of your bank by assigning each a unique branch code e Maintain the address of location of each of the branches and also their SWIFT TELEX and HOST addresses e Sp
261. r a financial period is open or it has been closed Each branch can view the status of a period in every other branch Click the period whose status you want to view Branch Displays the codes of the different branches of your bank Status Displays the corresponding status of the period code highlighted O indicates open status C indicates closed status The current financial cycle code and the current period code are displayed in the Branch Parameters Screen All details maintained in the Period Code Screen will automatically apply to any new branch if incorporated to your bank post maintenance of this screen The status of all periods in the new branch will be open 16 3 System Functions The system offers you the flexibility of posting transactions into a previous accounting period which has passed its due end date For example lets assume your bank s financial cycle extends from 1st January to 31st December the first period starts on 1 01 96 ends on 31 03 96 Even beyond 31 03 96 you can keep the period open to be able to post for example expense bills you expect to receive in April After you have posted all adjustments you can close the period IE ORACLE Even after you have closed the last accounting period of a year the system offers you the flexibility of posting adjustments to the financial year For each financial year the system generates an open status period called FIN Its start a
262. r account mask you have the option of separating the elements To do this you may use the following punctuation marks gt Dash gt Comma gt Asterisk gt Full stop gt Forward slash For Check Digit The last character in the customer account mask should always be a D or d This indicates the check digit which is generated by the system When specified in the mask the check digit component is generated using either of the following methods gt Modulo 11 gt Modulo 97 gt Modulo 11 with Weights gt User Defined Algorithm If you choose Modulo 97 all components of the account mask for example the Branch Code the Account Class the CIF ID etc should be numeric For example if you enter bbb in the account mask field indicating that the branch code should be part of the account number and choose the Modulo 97 option ensure that the branch code is a numeric value such as 000 123 etc The maximum length of twenty characters for the customer account mask is inclusive of the check digit All customer accounts that are entered in any branch of your bank will compulsorily have to conform to the mask 2 14 Example You want the following elements to be part of the customer account mask e The currency of the account e The nature of the account savings current etc and e The Customer Id Given the above criteria the customer account mask would be ACLASSC
263. r details about how the currency cut off checks are applied on a funds transfer transaction refer the chapter Processing a Funds Transfer Contract in the Funds Transfer User Manual on ORACLE 8 3 8 4 8 4 1 Handling Euro On 1 January 1999 eleven countries that are part of the European Union embarked on the first phase of economic integration called the Economic and Monetary Union EMU In Oracle FLEXCUBE the eleven countries participating in the first phase of the EMU are referred to as In countries and the respective national currencies as In currencies All other countries are referred to as Out countries The first phase of the EMU referred to as the transition period ushered in a new single European currency the Euro EUR During this phase the National Currency Denominations of In countries would co exist with the Euro That is transactions involving an In currency would typically be routed through the Euro during this phase At the end of the transition period in mid 2002 however the national currencies of the participating countries would cease to exist as valid legal tenders The Euro would be the only legal tender in In countries In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can handle the Euro and the attendant implications for your bank by capturing additional currency and settlements related information This chapter details how this information is to be captured and its implica
264. r end profit and loss account You can select a GL code from the option list of all assets liabilities income and expense GLs maintained in the chart of accounts screen Transaction Code Indicate the transaction code that should be used to post the balances in the income and expense accounts to the year end GL account You can select a transaction code from the list of transaction codes maintained in the Transaction Code Maintenance screen TDS Computation Method Select the TDS computation method from the drop down list You have the following options e Cash Basis e _Projection Basis TDS computation is handled based on the method selected at the bank parameter level You cannot change the computation method after initial set up Spread Capture the following details 2 7 Spread Application Indicate the transaction legs for which the spread should be applicable Choose the appropriate option from the following available in the adjoining drop down list e Single Leg e Both Legs Spool File Purge Days Specify the duration for which spool files should be stored in the spool file directory Interpay Lead Days Specify the inter pay lead days required for fetching billing records for inter pay files for automatic billing of clients Auto Batch Each time you post journal and multi offset entries you need to open a batch You can specify that the batch numbers of the journal entry batches opened in your bank s
265. r receivable tracking As a result the System performs the available balance check before debiting the account The available balance also includes the limit amount Verification of funds is applicable only in the case of Auto Liquidation If you leave this option unchecked the System performs a force liquidation regardless of whether the account has sufficient funds or not Note the following You will not be allowed to change these preferences at the account level However in the Amounts and Dates section of the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen both the total debit interest due as well as the charges due are displayed If there is any outstanding interest or charges on the account the outstanding amount is displayed as an override while saving the transaction involving the account While closing an account closure the System verifies whether there is any outstanding debit interest or charges on the account You will need to liquidate these before Account Closure An error log is created to store the error details of accounts for which liquidation could not be performed due to the following reasons The Verify Funds option is enabled and partial liquidation is performed The Verify Funds option is enabled and the account has insufficient funds Accounting entries do not get passed successfully irrespective of whether the Verify Funds option is set or not Refer the End of Day processing for Debiting Receivable GLs se
266. r such overrides you can assign an additional parameter to indicate whether an online authorization is required if the override is accepted If you have assigned online authorization to be required then for transactions involving such overrides an online authorization is requested as a mandatory procedure The online authorization limit specified for the authorizer would be checked during authorization in addition to the time level of the authorizer which should be greater than the user who is input the transaction For such overrides if you have specified that no online authorization is required the user can accept the override and it will not require any online authorization Error This would indicate that when an exception occurs an override message would be displayed and the transaction cannot be processed further that is it would stop being processed until the exception is corrected ae ORACLE Online Authorization This would indicate that an override message would be displayed seeking confirmation from the user However in this case online authorization would be required as a mandatory procedure if the override were accepted Dual Authorization This would indicate that an override message would be displayed seeking confirmation from the user However in this case online authorization would be required as a mandatory procedure if the override were accepted Also at least two authorizers would be needed to authoriz
267. racle FLEXCUBE system you can classify the customer accounts of your bank into different groups and assign each an identifying code For instance you may define a group called INDSB to represent savings accounts held by individuals SB INS to comprise institutional savings accounts COR CU for corporate current accounts Each group is referred to as an Account Class and is maintained in the Account Class screen For each class you also define certain common attributes applicable to all accounts in this class such as the General Ledger lines to which the accounts in this class report to facilities granted to the account holders pass book check book ATM etc In the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen where you open accounts for the customers of your bank each customer account is linked to an account class and the attributes defined for the account class are by default applicable to the customer account For instance if the frequency of account statement generation has been defined as daily for an account class CU COR the system generates statements for all accounts under this class on a daily basis However some of the parameters defined for the account class can be revised at the account level for any of the accounts linked to the class Account level parameters will supersede those defined for the account class While defining the account classes you should also keep in mind that the interest rate structure is also specifi
268. ranch and rate for which the preferences effective date amount slab etc are being set up a ORACLE 15 1 1 1 Specifying Currency Details You can associate several currencies with a Rate Code For example you can have a Rate Code TERMLON495 with a description of Rates for a Term Loan of 45 days You can define rates for the same Rate Code in different currencies Thus you can define a set of rates for contracts in USD and another set for contracts in GBP Click add icon and select a currency code from the option list available When you link a contract in USD to the Rate Code TERMLON45 the rates defined for this currency will be applied Similarly if the contract is in GBP the rates defined for that currency would be applied 15 1 1 2 Specifying Effective Dates and Amount Slab Amount Slab A floating rate can be defined as per an amount slab structure You should specify the upper limit of the slab to which a particular rate should be applied Example Suppose the following is the slab structure you want to maintain for the Rate Code FLO1 and Currency USD Amount Slab 250 Thousand 1 Million 3 Million 3 Million The Basis Amount To for the first slab or tier should be indicated as 250 000 that for the second slab as 1 000 000 and so on In case component amount is greater than the highest slab the appropriate rate for highest amount slab is picked up an applied Similarly
269. ransaction type Enter the description using a maximum of 35 characters alphanumeric For example for TCT code you can enter Transfer Charges Transaction SWIFT Code This is the SWIFT code to which this transaction code is linked It is used for posting transaction details on SWIFT format Select from the option list It will display a list of SWIFT formatted codes representing transaction types The following list is displayed SWIFT CODES TRANSACTION TYPE BOE Bill of Exchange BRF Brokerage fee CHG Charges and other Expenses CHK Cheques ee ORACLE SWIFT CODES TRANSACTION TYPE CLR Cash Letter Cheque Remittance COL Collections COM Commission DCR Documentary Credit for Principal Amount DIV Dividends Warrants EQA Equivalent Amount ECK Euro checks FEX Foreign Exchange INT Interest LBX Lock Box LDP Loan Deposit MSC Miscellaneous RTI Returned Item SEC Securities STO Standing Order TCK Travelers Cheques TRF Transfer VDA Value Date Adjustment The codes COL Collections DCR Documentary Credit and SCC Securities are used when entering a principal amount MIS Head Each Transaction Code that is created can be linked to an MIS Head An MIS Head indicates the manner in which the type of entry should be considered for profitability reporting purposes 18 2 1 1 Indicating Availability Information Thi
270. rd All unauthorized modifications get displayed when you click Authorize menu option You can select a modification number and the records get authorized till that modification These records are un tanked and their status gets updated as Authorized You can authorize the modifications partially if required 27 2 6 Deleting a Record All unauthorized records will be available for deletion You can select a modification number and system deletes all unauthorized modifications from the selected modification number If the modifications getting deleted are made by a user other than the current user the system displays an error message 27 2 7 Viewing Summary of Records All summary screens display data retrieved from both the summary data source and the table that contains the unauthorized tanked records ate ORACLE 27 2 8 Modifying Tanking Preferences You can modify the tanking preferences specified for a function Id if required This modification is possible only if all records related to that function Id are in Authorized status ote ORACLE 28 Annexure B File Formats 28 1 Introduction As mentioned earlier SWIFT provides a country wise holiday list that can be uploaded into Oracle FLEXCUE using the CCH source code This file consists of the HF and HS records HF and HS are the tag identifiers through which the currency code can be obtained 28 2 Upload File Formats HF Non European
271. rence Body of the report This report is sorted module wise For every module the following details are displayed e Module e Product e User ID The following transaction details are displayed Reference No This is the reference number of the account for which deleted transaction details is being reported Ac Br This is the branch where the account resides Account Number This is the account number Ccy This is the currency of the transaction Dr Cr This indicates the nature of the transaction debit or credit Trn Code This is the transaction code Account This is the account description description Fey Amount This is the transaction amount in foreign currency Trn Description This is the transaction description Narrative This is the narrative text associated with the transaction Instrument No This is the instrument number linked to the transaction Total Debits Total amount debited under the product Total Credits Total amount credited under the product 32 3 ORACLE Reference No This is the reference number of the account for which deleted transaction details is being reported User ID This is the user ID of the user who entered the transaction Product This is the product code of the transaction User Id This is the user ID of the user who entered the transaction Reference No This is the transaction reference number Ac Br This
272. ries need to be stored handed off or not If selected the system will store position creating pair entries separately for handoff to other external systems When processing accounting entries the system will check whether you have opted for pair wise positioning If you opt for this option the system will check for the following conditions in all the accounting entries that are posted e The set of entries posted are balanced i e total LCY debit is equal to total LCY credit e Atleast one pair of accounting entry is in FCY e Both the currencies are not the same If the above conditions hold true the system will store the entries along with the following information e Dr Account indicates the debit leg s account GL e Cr Account indicates credit leg s account GL e Event Code is the event of the transaction e Dr CCY Bought Currency e Dr Amount Bought Amount 2 27 e Cr CCY Sold Currency e Cr Amount Sold Amount e Dr Booking Date Cr Booking Date e Dr Value Date Cr Value Date e Dr Transaction Code Cr Transaction Code e Exchange Rate e Hand Off Flag white passing pair wise position entries the main component will be passed with TRF_AMT tag and the equivalent entry will be passed with the AMT_EQUIV tag Example Let the local currency of your branch be JPY Dr Cr Acc GL Amount Rate LCY Eqv Dr Loan GL 1000 USD 100 100 000 JPY Cr Customer Acc 1600 EUR 62 5 100 000 JPY
273. rnal Swap Customer You need to specify an internal swap customer for processing internal swaps The names of all the customers of your bank will be displayed in the option list provided This will be a unique customer meant for processing internal swaps Clearing Account Specify the default GL account to be used for clearing transactions at the branch Offset Clearing Account Specify the default offset GL account to be used for clearing transactions at the branch Weekly Holiday 1 amp 2 Using this option you can indicate the holiday in a week for your branch You can select the day for holiday from dropdown list If you want to set only one holiday in a week for your branch select the day for Weekly Holiday 1 and leave Weekly Holiday 2 Blank If you want to opt for two holidays in a week select the days for Weekly Holiday 1 amp Weekly Holiday 2 Clearing Bank Code Specify the code by which your bank is identified in the Clearing Network you participate in This has to the same as that specified for your bank in the Clearing Bank Code Maintenance screen IFSC Code is a unique code which is used to identify the banks in NEFT RTGS network You need to specify the IFSC Code for the branch which is maintained in Bank Directory Maintenance 4 16 MIS Group for Currency Mismatch Entries If the posting of automatic balancing entries due to currency and value date mismatches has been specified for your bank you can specify the MIS co
274. rol number Therefore the 13 digit 4 The customer account number will now read as 000 4 1 123456 1 4 Numeric Account Masks with User Defined Algorithms as Checksum Algorithm If the check digit component within a Customer Account Number is to be generated using a method of your choice you must identify the following e The User Defined Algorithm for the Customer Account Number this identifies the name of the user defined algorithm for check digit generation of account numbers e The User Defined Algorithm for Consumer Number this stores the name of the user defined algorithm for validating consumer numbers While capturing Customer Account numbers the System checks for your specification for the checksum algorithm If you have selected User Defined the check digit is generated using the specified user defined algorithm Since these parameters are maintained for your bank they are defaulted to the branches of your bank You will not be allowed to change these for a specific branch of your bank Pure Numeric Masks A numeric account mask which does not have a checksum algorithm associated with it is called a pure numeric mask Since it does not have a checksum algorithm associated with it you will have to specify the start and end account numbers and enable the auto generated option The start account number forms the basis on which customer accounts numbers are to be generated Similarly you will not be allow
275. ross Currency Transactions esssseseessesesseeeseseseresrsrrerrsrrersrerrresrsrresesreerese 12 6 13 MAINTAINING CURRENCY SPREAD FOR CUSTOMER ssessesesersceesesoesesecesoesoroeseseseeoesosoeseeseeseesoe 13 1 13 1 MAINTAINING CUSTOMER SPREAD DETAILS cccescesesseescesecsseseceeecseeescssecesesecssesecnesesessenesesessueseeneeeney 13 1 131 2 Computing Buy and Sell Spreads sssssssscesscevscesecssecnsecneeceesnasonesonssensesnsosseessesseesseessesnaesnersaes 13 2 ORACLE 13 1 3 Maintaining Customer Spread Details for CL Accounts sccescceseceseesseesseeseeeeceeeeesecesecnsecnaecaeenee 13 3 14 DEFINING CURRENCY RATE TYPEG ccsssccsssssscessssccesssseccessccccssssccccsseccecnsceccesececessccecesssceeeees 14 1 T41 INIRODUCTION enian Gago bk eee SO ean ep A ene eae ee aes 14 1 15 MAINTAINING FLOATING RATES sccccsssssccssssccesssccccsssccccsssccccssseccsessceecscnscescsssaceeesssseceessceeeees 15 1 15 1 FLOATNGRATES ociosos eninde aie ei ar e Ere aae a EE ien EEE EEE E EEES 15 1 16 PERIOD CODE MAINTENANCE seesesseoescsecssoceessecesssecsesceesscsessscceesseceseoeesssceesseoeseseesessecesesessssoeesseceee 16 1 16 1 INTRODUCTION rninn er r EEE SE E E EEE A E vie cane cae eee 16 1 16 2 INVOKING PERIOD CODE MAINTENANCE SCREEN cccsessesssseseeececsesseaeeecececsesnaaeceeececsesseaesesecseeeseneaeeeeess 16 1 16 3 OAOA FUNCTIONS a a 16 3 17 STATUS CODE MAINTENANCE sssssssesserssoesesoscesoses
276. routed through the CLS bank From the available list of CLS currencies you can further maintain a list of allowed or disallowed currencies for a specific customer Every customer who is a CLS Participant will be allowed to trade in all the available CLS currencies unless specifically mentioned Refer the Continuous Linked Settlements chapter of the Foreign Exchange User Manual for details on maintaining currency restrictions and other maintenances required for processing CLS deals in Oracle FLEXCUBE New COV Format Required Check this box to indicate that cover message needs to be sent in the new format for transactions involving the currency specified here For more details on new cover message formats refer settlements user manual Validate Tag 50F Check this box to indicate that validations need to be performed for the 50F details captured for the ordering customer during contract input For more details on 50F validations refer the chapter titled Maintaining Addresses for a Customer in Messaging System user manual Indicating Rounding Preferences Rule This refers to the method to be followed for rounding off fractional units of a currency The rounding preferences available are e Truncate The amount is truncated to the number of decimals specified for the currency e Round Up The amount is rounded up based on the number of decimals and the nearest rounding unit e Round Down The a
277. s Intraday Release Available Balance Check Required Interests and Charges Penalty Inclusion Inter Branch in Local Currency Acumen Transaction Code Exempt Advance Interest Modification Number Wi authorized H open If you indicate that AML tracking is required for transactions linked to the transaction code you have to identify the product category with which the transaction code is to be linked Consequently the system does a check for every accounting entry passed during online processing The system checks the transaction amount of the entry with the transaction online limit maintained for the specific customer group of the customer to whose account the entry has been posted and the product category for the transaction code of the entry If the system finds that the limit amount has been exceed an override message informing you of the same will be displayed 31 1 ORACLE During the End of Day EOD processing the system identifies all accounting entries posted during the day which have been marked for AML monitoring and verifies the individual amount limit for the customer group and product category combination and stores this data in the system You will be able to view this data when you generate an AML report using Business Objects As part of the EOD processes the system also updates the daily turnover limits for the particular customer group and product category combination Monthly turnovers are updated for
278. s e A specific module or all modules ie ORACLE e A specific branch or all branches e A specific rate code The transaction amount limit above which the exchange rate must be entered for a high value transaction could be defined in terms of currency pair where the currency of the transaction is currency1 in the CCY pair defined in the maintenance Example In the San Francisco branch of your bank you do not wish to allow default of exchange rates automatically for funds transfer payments for the currency pair USD GBP exceeding 10000 USD So this Limit Amount of 1000 USD will be maintained as follows Branch 000 Module FT CCY1 USD CCY2 GBP Rate Code Standard Limit CCY USD Limit Amount 100000 When an FT transaction with transaction currency as USD happens where the offset currency is GBP the system will check for the Limit Amount defined for the currency pair USD GBP If the transaction amount is more than the limit amount defined here the system will not default the exchange rate for the pair Instead it will force the User to enter the rate manually for the transaction To ensure that users manually enter exchange rates for high value cross currency transactions in Oracle FLEXCUBE you must specify the limit amounts that must be validated for each transaction in terms of currency pair product module and branch combination You can use the Product Limits Maintenance screen to specify the li
279. s Details to Nodes This indicates whether or not the BIC data maintained in HO has to be propagated to other branches present in different instances Check this box to propagate BIC details Derive Mid Rate amp spread from Buy Rate and Sell Rate Check this box to indicate that the system should calculate the Mid Rate column on enrich You need to specify the Buy Rate and Sell Rate and system will calculate the Mid rate Buy Spread and Sell Spread during currency rate maintenance Maintenance of Customer Identification Mask at Branch Node level This option gives you the flexibility to define different CIF masks at the Nodes Bank level If you select Bank from the option list then the CIF mask given at Bank level will be applied to all the branches under it If you select Node from the option list you will need to maintain CIF masks at the Node level in the Node wise CIF Mask Maintenance screen This would ensure that the branches maintained in different nodes instances have different CIF masks Click Nodewise CIF mask Maintenance button to access this screen The screen appears as shown below Z Nodewise CIF Mask Maintenance Web Page Dialog J x CIF Mask F O Nodes Customer Identification File Mask Autogenerate Customer Identification File Number EJ T FCKERNEL WORLD nnnnnnn E EJ You can specify the following details here 2 29 Nodes This indicates the n
280. s because spread details for a 4 day tenor is unavailable for the customer and currency pair You can also maintain customer spreads for the wildcard entry ALL If spread details for a specific counterparty for the currency pair are unavailable the System looks for the customer spread maintained for the wildcard ALL entry If even that is not available then the customer spread defaults to zero Computing Buy and Sell Spreads Using percentage system suppose the bank wants to make a profit of 5 over and above the mid rate quoted Suppose the dealing currencies are USD and AUD 1USD 1 4166 AUD for Standard rate type Mid rate being 1 4166 Now to arrive at the spread the bank will use the following formula Spread 5 100 x Mid rate 1 4166 0 07083 Example Currency Currency Rate Mid Buy Sale Code 1 Code 2 Type Rate Spread Spread USD AUD STD 1 4166 0 07083 0 07083 USD AUD TT 1 3666 0 06833 0 06833 USD AUD CASH 1 2666 0 06333 0 06333 Using the points system suppose the point quoted by the bank is 708 3 The points multiplier in this case would be 0 0001 depends on the decimal points that the mid rate extends to Usually it is 4 decimal places Spread Points 708 3 x Points Multiplier 0 0001 Now coming to the buy and sale rate computing there are two ways of computing the buy and sale rates Direct and Indirect Depending upon the quotation method you have spec
281. s states the different time intervals after which funds will be available for withdrawal in case of all transactions posted under this transaction code 18 3 ORACLE The system defaults to immediate which means that funds will be immediately available for withdrawal the immediate option on the screen Example Teller Transaction For all Clearing transactions you have the option to specify as to when will funds be made available for withdrawal Click the desired option Click On Value Date option if you want funds to be available on the date the transaction became effective Example A loan or a deposit Incase you want to specify the number of days after which funds should be available for withdrawal click on the option After Days Enter the number in the box It could be any two digit positive integer from 1 to 99 This option will make funds available for all transactions posted under this code on the specified date from the value date Example Demand Draft When you click the last option that is After Days with New Value Date and enter the number of days in the box then the original value date of the contract will take a new value date This new value date old value date the number of days input by the user in the box against the option Example Future dated funds transfer The difference between the third and fourth option being that in the latter case the old value date changes while in the former the value date do
282. s will report to when it moves to the status being defined You can identify the debit GL from the list of existing GLs Likewise all credits within a particular account class will report to the GL account that you have identified to track credits Dr and Cr Central Bank Lines Select the Central Bank Debit line to which all debit accounts belonging to an account class should report to when it moves to the selected status You have maintained Central Bank Debit lines in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen You can select the appropriate CB Debit Line from the available option list Similarly all accounts belonging to an account class if in credit should report to a Central Bank Credit Line for the selected status You can identify the CB Credit Line that should be associated with the status from the option list available Dr and Cr Head Office Lines This is the Debit Head Office GL maintained in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen to which all accounts belonging to this class will report if they move to the status being defined Similarly select the Credit Head Office GL maintained in the Reporting Lines Maintenance screen to which all accounts belonging to this class will report to when they move to the status being defined Bas a mandatory requirement you have to associate the status NORM Normal when maintaining status codes for an account class Accounting Roles and Heads for Provisioning In addi
283. se czestesecdecuese ESER EEKEREN 25 1 23A Types OF Overrides osinean oeann i Eea KEE ERS E RENEE E EK O EREA 25 1 ZIAD Specyying Override Ly Pe vvicscasacstressagdeycasediea on E RR AR A E E RER i 25 2 26 PURGING DATA uu ccccscensssccnsecsnsesnscssensssssnssscsnesosesssnsssssnsssesnessessssssssssensssccncesossossesssssessssneesosssesoss 26 1 26 1 INTRODUCTION siesescsasdesdbst esesdesaesc san E NA EPEE EEREN ba seg cstetugssestag bet adtvgads adh EEE EPEE EEEE ENERE EEES 26 1 20 2 MAINTAINING PURGE DETAILS occ scsseteedessesccbesstedevgoesceecsesdetedsrsdesgostodevcisebeevesstsusiqderddebgseredeveeeeteetaosnodsbes 26 2 27 TANKING OF MAINTENANCE RECORDS eesesseseseeeccesoroesesesecoseosousesecoeoeroroeseceeoeseroeoesereeoseosorseseeese 27 1 274 INTRODUCTION gsescescsscsecscssescoscsdes tecsuese csesdet vecsucse cnc sddce cecusess obdoatee tecededentdsuces Sean iia EEan inin asein ioi 27 1 27 2 TANKING NEW AND MODIFIED MAINTENANCE RECORDS s ccssessesesseseessseeseeessecaeeesseeaseesseeaseessasaseesiaeas 27 1 272d Tanking NEW RECOLAS oiiciscis csesceocsdnscant anaivaieas navaeeioniveds iderenssneescencdseavenssugncedesdaaeasesstseescipecceptinatondeaye 27 2 27 2 2 Tanking Modified Records ccccsccesseeeseeseeesceeecesecesecusecusecacecaeecaeecseeseeeeeeeeeeceeaeesaecsaecaaesaaeeseeenaees 27 2 27 2 3 Closing a Record soseer asane ere AE EE EOE ON SEREEN EAEN E EEAO EENE 27 2 2724 RE OPEHING GRECO sseni se R EE EEEE ENERE E ETE
284. sebadodeusesevsedas 23 1 23 2 INVOKING CURRENCY HOLIDAY SCREEN cccsssessccecececsesssseceeececsesneseeecececsessaaeceeececseseaeeeeeeeesenenneaeeeeees 23 1 23 2 1 Steps to Define Currency HOlidays ccccccesccesceseceseceecnseeceessesseeseeeseeeeecesecesecusecaecsaecaaecaeeeaeeeatens 23 2 2322 Defining Currency Holidays sisi coviscsiscosscisctsoessnesySanoajesisds cseussesnostweeapsnesscesedtade 3ag0euenscbeodeaventinsuteed 23 2 23 3 UPLOADING HOLIDAY FILE ccccccccccecsesssceceeeceesesnesececececsesseaeceeececsesasececececsessaassecececseseaeaeeeeeceenenseaeeeeecs 23 3 24 MAINTAINING CLEARING HOLIDAYS u ssccssssscesssccccssseccssssscccsssscccesscccccssscesssssecccessseccscssceceees 24 1 24 1 INTRODUCTION mirc sate Beeses cobb E E dase sds needs eS a 24 1 24 1 1 Steps to Define Clearing House Holidays cccccccescceseceseesseenseeseeeeeeseeeeeeesecesecaecaecaecaaesaaeeseeeneees 24 1 244 2 Defining Clearing House Holidays ccccccesccesccesecesecesecnseesseesseeseeeeeeneeeeeeesecesecesecaecaecaaessaeeaeeeneees 24 2 24 1 3 Designating Unexpected Holidays for Clearing HOuS c ccccccsssessseecesecesecesecnsecnsecneeeeeeseeeneees 24 2 ORACLE 25 CONFIGURING OVERRIDES cccscssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssessssssessessssessessssessessesessassssessessssessesessesees 25 1 25 1 INTRODUCTION iscse cic sccsecesitss Se dtseczesutse czestesectesutse due ddtsecuesutse czastesectesutse tuedihsesuesut
285. sed under a branch In order to achieve this you need to invoke the Clearing Currency screen by clicking the Branch Currency button in the Branch Parameters Maintenance screen Branch Parameters Clearing Currency Branch Description Clearing Currencies 1of1 Currency Code Currency Description 73 Here you can capture the following details Branch Code The branch code gets defaulted from the Branch Parameters Detail View screen A brief description of the branch is displayed alongside Currency Code Specify the currency in which you wish to allow clearing transactions under this branch You can specify multiple currencies for a branch Click on the adjoining option list and select the appropriate code from the list of currencies maintained in the system Currency Description A description of the chosen currency code is displayed here 4 3 Maintaining Value Date Spread for Branch The Branch Value Date Spread refers to the number of days that should be applied to transfers with a value date that is later than the effective cut off date You can maintain value date spread details in the Value Date Spread screen Invoke this screen by typing CYDVDSPR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button 4 31 Z Yalue Date Spread Maintenance Web Page Dialog gz 2 x E
286. seeeeeeseresrseesesrrsrssereresesrresesrenrsserreserrreresresrsee 12 30 2 3 Capturing Details about Specially Designated Nationals oseesneseeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeesrereersrereresrrrresrsreeseee 13 30 2 4 Specifying your Preferences for Account CLASS cccccsccessceescesecesecesecsecaeecaeeeseeeaeeseeeeeeesecesecnaeeaeeaas 14 30 2 5 Specifying Liquidation Preferences for Debit Interest and Charges ccccscesseeseeseeeseeseceneenecnseeees 17 30 2 6 Maintaining Details for Free Banking eccccssccescceessecessceenseceseeeessecesecesscecsuceeeasececeeeneecseneeenaeceeeeeenaees 18 30 2 7 Specifying Initial Funding PreferenCeS seseseseseeeeesesrereserreesrsreersersreserererrreesrsreereserresserreeresereerese 18 30 2 8 Maintaining Provisioning DetailS seesesseseeeeeneeseeeseereeresesrresesreeresrrrrerrerresesreerrsrenrsreereserreeresrnetset 19 30 2 9 Maintaining Status Codes for Account Class sccescecceecsesceescesecesecesecaecacecaeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeasenaesnaeenes 20 30 2 10 Specifying Reporting line Details sccccccsscesseesseescesscesecesecesecsecaeecaceeseeeseeseeeeeseeeeseeeasensesnaesnaeenes 21 30 2 11 Maintaining Auto Deposits 0iseorsorssssessessnissnsineavooesondesniconaoneetseassosisesnesntsedeasedsseeevespestonsioneventaandbes 22 30 2 12 Maintaining Rules for Automatic Status CHAN ge 1 ccsccescceseesseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecnseceaecaecaeeeseeeseees 24 30 2 13 Maintaining Sequence for Funds AllOCAti
287. sify currencies into different currency types The bank can use its own discretion to decide the basis of classifying currencies into different currency types A currency type can consist of a maximum of three characters Depending on the customer account mask maintained the value in the currency type field would be used during the generation of customer account numbers through the Customer Accounts Maintenance screen If you have decided to include currency type as part of the customer account number in the account number mask then at the time of creating a new customer account number you will need to select the currency of the account number being generated In the option list provided for currency the currency code is displayed along with the associated currency type say USD 1 GBP 2 etc When the account number gets populated it is the currency type that forms a part of the customer account number ISO Numeric Currency Code Specify the currency code specified by the International Standardization Organization Country After you have identified the currency you should indicate the country to which the currency belongs You can select a country code from the option list available Decimals You can indicate the number of decimal units up to which the currency can be denominated The number of decimals allowed for any amount in the currency can be 0 Currency with no decimals 2 Currency with two decimals 3 Currency wit
288. sset type of GL account If the hash definition at the bank level indicates that the refund of tax should be allowed then this field is enabled Tax Receivable GL 2 Type the GL code for the tax receivable GL 2 This GL is used to debit for tax refund on the backdated debit interest adjustment This GL is an asset type of GL account If the hash definition at the bank level indicates that the refund of tax should be allowed then this field is enabled Other Details Tab You can capture additional details for the bank in the Other Details tab Click Other Details tab to enter the details FCCORE Bank Parameters Maintenance Bank Tax Id Central Bank Code Future Dated Funds Transfer Parameters Head Office LO Head Office Cost Center Holiday Processing N Default Bank Currency Head Office Currency Hold For Liability Product Start Year Month Index Rate Period Hold for Asset Product IDD Max Days Customer inactivity period TDS Next Remittance interface Flag Date TDS Start Month Last Revaluation Date TD Variance for OD automatic AcctNo Generation Next Revaluation Date Week Start Day Els interface Revaluation Base Book Rate v Rate VAT Reserve Calculation Daily Next Revaluation Monthly Amount VAT Frequency Frequency Hold Amount Flag Flier to be sent with No Fliers Statement I T Circle Address oe 99999999999 IT Circle Number Limits Revaluation Frequency
289. t Contingent Suspense GL Local and Foreign Currency The accounting entries that belong to contingent asset or contingent liability GL categories will be posted to a Contingent Suspense GL To indicate the contingent suspense GL for a branch click option list and select a GL code from the option list ATM Select the appropriate option from the option list 4 9 Euro Redenomination GL To facilitate the currency conversion process you have to maintain a common Conversion GL and a Transaction Code The conversion GL that you specify in this screen will be identified as the common suspense GL for all balance conversions while re denominating the currency of an account either for specific customers or for generic conversions In addition to the conversion GL you have to indicate a Transaction Code which identifies conversion related entries Payment Messages Generate 103 The Generate MT 103 option allows you to generate outgoing MT 103 messages in the MT 103 format This check box can be enabled only if you have enabled the generation of MT 103 messages as Payment Messages Note the following e The system will generate MT 103 messages as payment messages for transactions in the branch and generate them in the MT 103 format only if you have enabled this option in the following cases gt For the counterparty of the transaction in the BIC Code Maintenance gt By choosing the Generate 103
290. t Transactional Limits screen you can maintain the limits for e A specific module and a specific product e A specific module and all products select ZALL as the Product Code e All modules Select AL as the Module Code and all products Limit Currency The transaction limit currency is the currency in which you would like to maintain the amount limit are ORACLE 8 4 8 1 8 5 Transaction Amount Limit Each time you process a transaction the system will check the transaction amount against the limit maintained for the module product and currency combination involved in the contract Validating Transaction Amount during Contract Processing While saving a contract the system will check the transaction amount against the cut off amount maintained for the module product and the currency involved in the transaction If both the transaction currency and the limits currency are same the comparison will be done directly If different currencies are involved the system will first convert the transaction amount into the cutoff amount currency using the STANDARD mid rate and then perform the validations To perform the check the System will look for the limits maintained in the following order 1 The System looks for the limits maintained for a specific module and specific product combination 2 Ifthe first option is not available it checks the limits maintained for a specific module ZALP all products combinatio
291. t number manually for CASA and loan accounts IS Interface Check this box in order to enable integration between Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking and Oracle FLEXCUBE Retail Investor Services modules Reserve Qualification Frequency Select the reserve calculation frequency from the drop down list It is the frequency at which provisioning should take place for CASA and Loan accounts based on the customer CRR codes The options are as follows 2 39 e Daily e Weekly e Fortnightly e Monthly e Bi monthly e Quarterly e Half yearly e Yearly Filer to be Sent with Statement Select the type of flier to be sent along with the statement from the drop down list A flier is additional information with the statement The nature of OMR mark in the output statement file will be determined based on this flag The printer can append the required flier based on the OMR flag The options are as follows e No Flier e Small Flier e Large File Future Dated Funds Transfer Parameters Holiday Processing Specify the transaction date processing rule if the value date of the transaction falls on a holiday according to bank calendar You can select one of the following options from the drop down list e Next select this to process transactions on the next working day e Previous select this to process transactions on the next working day Hold for Liability Product Check this box if credit hold is required for liability type product
292. t of holidays for the currencies defined in the currency screen This is done in the Currency Holiday Calendar screen The system uses the information maintained in this screen to check whether any settlement involving a foreign currency in the foreign Exchange Money market Funds Transfer Loans amp Deposit modules falls on that currency s holiday If yes then the system will display a message stating so and ask the user for an override For any schedule or contract maturing at a future date say 5 years hence you can input the future date only if the calendar for that year has been maintained The currency holiday screen is maintained at the Bank Level by the Head Office 23 2 Invoking Currency Holiday Screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDCCHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button S M T vv Tr F Sa S M T W Tr F Sa S M T v Th F Sa January February March 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20 2 22 23 24 25 26 19 20 2 22 23 24 23 23 24 25 25 277 28 29 27 28 26 27 28 29 30 31 oH April May June 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 6 7 8 td 9 10 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 21 22 3 25 26 2 18 19 20 21 2 24 25 2 27 2 29 28 31 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 July August Se
293. t would be reported in the Settlement Account Currency However you can opt to additionally furnish the value of the component in Euro Related Information ERI currency You can maintain this ERI currency for a counterparty and currency combination in the Settlement Instructions Maintenance screen In the SWIFT messages that are generated towards settlement of a component involving the counterparty and the currency the component value will be expressed in this ERI currency by default Invoke this screen by typing ISDINSTR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Settlement Instructions Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 xi Branch 101 Module AL Counterparty 1010011 Product Code ALL Counterparty Type CF E Sequence Number Currency INR Relations Pay Receive Branch 101 Branch 101 IF cover Required Account 1009 Account 1009 Cover By z Currency INR Currency Charges Details Ourselves Payment By Message Payment By Message Benificiary Shared Pay Parties Pay Parties Receiver Parties Cover Parties Clear Details Cover Detials Other Details Intermediary Reimbursement Institution Intermediary T RTGS Payment RTGS Network j Fields Modification Number 1 8 4 5 Specifying Settlement Message Details SWIFT messages MT 100 MT202 generated towards settlement can furnish the value of the settlement am
294. t you have maintained for the currency pair is displayed on this screen 13 1 3 Maintaining Customer Spread Details for CL Accounts Oracle FLEXCUBE applies Customer Spread maintained under Customer Margin Maintenance to Interest Rates for CL Accounts Therefore the Final Interest Rate is arrived at after adding or deducting this spread maintained for Branch Customer Currency Amount Slab and Borrow Lend Indicator combinations In case of CL Account the latter combination is always Lend as depicted below WS ORACLE Customer Spread Maintenance Web Page Dialog Customer Currency Customer Spread Maintenance oO Amount Slab Spread Fields Input By TESTS Authorized By Date Time Date Time BORROVLEND Borrow Lend Modification number iv Open WB suthorizea For more details on Customer Spread for CL Accounts refer chapter Operation under section Amending Loan Accounts in the Retail Lending User Manual 13 4 ORACLE 14 Defining Currency Rate Types 14 1 Introduction Banks quote different exchange rates for different transaction types For instance traveler s checks are purchased at a certain rate a different rate is applicable for buying of foreign currency notes and so on In the Currency Rate Type Definition screen you define the rate types applicable to the different transaction categories of your bank Each rate type is assigned a code For instance
295. tained at the account level The system will pick up the number of leaves to be reordered from the field Reorder Number of Leaves maintained for the account The numbering of cheque leaves for the new Cheque Book will depend on the Cheque Number Unique for Branch option in the Bank Parameters screen If this option is checked the numbering will begin from the Last Number 1 of the Cheque Book that was delivered last to any account If you do not select this option the number will start from the Last Number 1 of the Cheque Book delivered to the same account previously The value of Include for Cheque Book Printing and Cheque Type specifications defined in the Cheque Book Details screen will be defaulted from the previous order of the Cheque Book 30 2 3 Capturing Details about Specially Designated Nationals Specially Designated Nationals SDN are those customers with whom you need to refrain from trading in any form The US government publishes a list of such nationals and circulates this list among banks and other financial organizations You can to maintain the details of SDNs in Oracle FLEXCUBE The details of Specially Designated Nationals are updated and published by the US government on a regular basis You could download these details from their web site You have two options to replicate the contents of this file into Oracle FLEXCUBE They are 1a ORACLE 1 Upload the file into Oracle FLEXCUBE t
296. ted then the following override message is displayed by the system Drawee belongs to restricted country Clearing Code in BIC Check this box to indicate that the National ID in the BIC plus file is the clearing code During upload of clearing codes from BIC plus file the records that belong to countries against which this box is checked will be selected Generate 205 Check this box to indicate that the cover message 205COV or 205 need to be generated for transactions involving this country If you do not select this option RTGS 202 or 202COV message will be generated For more details on 202COV and 205COV cover message formats refer settlements user manual Default Clearing Network Once the National ID from BIC plus directory is uploaded into clearing codes the network will be populated as the default clearing network for that country This is mandatory when clearing code in BIC is chosen as Y ne ORACLE 19 Tiered Customer Spread Maintenance 19 1 Introduction In the Tiered Customer Spread Maintenance screen you can capture tenor wise customer spread along with the details like branch code currency product tenor and so on Tenor based interest rates with customer spread is applicable only for the main interest component and not for the penalty component 19 2 Invoking Tiered Customer Spread Maintenance Screen You can invoke Tiered Customer Spread Maintenance screen by typing CFDCTRSP i
297. ted you will not be able to maintain the automatic reordering preferences for the account class L ORACLE Auto Reorder of Cheque Book You have to select this option to specify that automatic reordering of Cheque Books is required for all accounts reporting to this account class This field will be enabled only if you have checked the Cheque Book option explained above Reorder Level Here you have to indicate the level at which the reordering of Cheque Book should happen Automatic reordering will be set off by the system when the unused number of cheque leaves becomes equal to or less than the re order level that you maintain here This field will be enabled only if you have indicated that automatic reordering of Cheque Books is required i e the Auto Reorder of Cheque Book option is checked Reorder No of Leaves In this field you have to specify the number of leaves that should be ordered for the new Cheque Book This field will be enabled only if you have checked the Auto Reorder of Cheque Book option 30 2 2 1 Processing Automatic Reordering of Cheque Books The automatic reordering of Cheque Books is processed at EOD by executing a batch function The following conditions should be satisfied for initiation of automatic reordering e The Auto Reorder of Cheque Book option is turned on at the account level e The number of unused check leaves for the account is less than or equal to the reorder level main
298. ter the value for the UDFs listed here in the Value column For more details on how to create user Defined fields refer chapter Creating custom fields in Oracle FLEXCUBE in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity Specifying Account Generation Parameters at Bank Level Account numbers in your bank are generated in the format of the account mask that you specify through the Account Parameters sub screen of the Bank wide Parameters screen Click Account Mask button in the Bank wide Parameters screen Account Parameters screen is displayed The screen appears as shown below 2 12 Account Parameters Web Page Dialog E a b lx Customer Account Mask nnnnnnn Checksum Algorithm User Defined Algorithm Customer Account Consumer Number Start Account Number End Account Number T cust Account Auto Genrate IF Loan Account Auto Generate Auto Account Creation Start Account Number End Account Number Since account level parameters are defined at the bank level by default these parameters will be defaulted to all the branches of your bank However individual branches of your bank will be allowed to change these specifications 2 1 7 1 Specifying Customer Account Mask Account numbers can either be generated automatically or you can choose to allocate them manually In Oracle FLEXCUBE you have the option of maintaining three types of account masks They are as follows e Alph
299. th is 0199 At EOD of the last day of the month the sequence numbers generated till date will be dropped and the system will begin regeneration starting from 0001 once again for all subsequent contracts Range You can specify a range of sequential reference numbers If you specify such a range then no additional details need be specified If you do not specify a range you can specify additional details specific to each component of the sequence format In addition to the above details you should also maintain details specific to each component of the sequence format The details are as follows Component Order Each component is assigned an order number based on which they would appear in the user reference number The component order is automatically generated by the system and is non editable Component Each component in the sequence format is identified as one of the following e An Oracle FLEXCUBE Component If your sequence format uses an Oracle FLEXCUBE column directly you can specify it as an Oracle FLEXCUBE Component For instance you may want to include the product group associated with the product code involved in a contract as a component in sequence number generation To achieve this you will use the Oracle FLEXCUBE column PRODUCT_GROUP available in the table CSTM_PRODUCT as an Oracle FLEXCUBE Component e A User Component You may want the first two characters of your bank s name to be part of all the user r
300. the box unchecked to disallow a customer from being assigned to this account class 30 2 21 Maintaining Notice Preferences You can specify the notice preferences for the withdrawal of amount through the Notice Preferences screen Click Notice in the Account Class Maintenance screen The Notice Preferences screen is displayed as follows ae ORACLE F Notice Preference Web Page Dialog w EJ Account Class PNLS Description Saving Advance Interest Monthly Free Amount 2000 Notice Days 30 Validity Period 10 The following fields are displayed in this screen e Account Class The unique code assigned to the account class is displayed e Description A short description of the account class is displayed The following are the notice preferences that you can specify for an account class Advance Interest Check this field to levy the advance interest on the account class Note the following e The customer of the account class is liable to pay this interest in case he she fails to provide the required notice to the bank e The system deducts the advance interest from the credit Interest earned by the customer of the account class on his her credit balance in the account Monthly Free Amount Specify the amount that a customer of the account class can withdraw per calendar month from his her savings account without being liable to pay advance interest Notice Days Specify the
301. the detailed name of the bank This name will always be displayed whenever the bank code is used Specifying Details of Head Office Branch After specifying a code to identify your bank you should specify details of the head office of your bank Code From the list of the branches you have already maintained of your bank designate one as your Head Office Description The description of the branch designated as Head Office is displayed External Branch Code External Bank Code Specify the external bank code If Oracle FLEXCUBE Corporate calls any database unit from Oracle FLEXCUBE Retail Host database this external bank code will be provided as an additional parameter with the call Maintaining Financial Preferences In this screen you can maintain information regarding default currency for the branch specify if balancing entries must be automatically generated in case of mismatches define routing mask clearing bank code etc Specifying Default Currency Codes You can indicate currency preferences for your bank You can specify preferences to indicate the default currencies for the following purposes e Local The currency that you indicate as the local currency will be taken as the local currency for all branches of your bank and the default currency for all transactions input into Oracle FLEXCUBE The income and expense balances of your bank will also be maintained in this currency e Discount If the discount rate
302. the exchange rate for the currency pair is quoted as follows Buy rate mid rate buy spread Sell rate mid rate sell spread Ccy 1 Rate x Ccy 2 In the Indirect method the exchange rate for the currency pair is quoted as follows Buy rate mid rate buy spread Sell rate mid rate sell spread Ccy 2 Rate x Ccy 1 Example The market follows the direct quote convention for the currency pair USD DEM e g 1USD 1 6051DEM To maintain this pair you would specify currency 1 as USD and currency 2 as DEM and specify direct in this field For the USD GBP pair which is quoted indirectly 1 GBP 1 5021 USD the USD will be defined as currency 1 and the GBP as currency 2 with the quotation method indirect Number of Units This indicates the number of units of currency to be used for currency conversion ee ORACLE Example Quotation Method No Of Units Formula for calculating conversion rate Direct 1 1ccy1 rate x ccy2 Direct 100 100 ccy1 rate x ccy2 Direct 1000 1000 ccy1 rate x ccy2 Indirect 1 1ccy2 rate x ccy2 Indirect 100 100ccy2 rate x ccy1 Indirect 1000 1000ccy2 rate x ccy1 Spread Definition You need to indicate the method in which the spread for a currency pair needs to be defined There are two ways of defining the spread in points and in percentage The effective spread can be calculated using any of the following two methods e In points
303. the status e Asequence number for the status e The type of status Indicate whether the status codes are maintained for an Account or for a Contract or for Both The type of status you choose depends on the status processing basis for your branch which is defined in the Branch Parameters Preferences maintenance If status processing basis is at individual account contract level you can choose the applicable status types as Account or Contract The status codes that have been maintained of type Account are available for association in the Account maintenance and those maintained with type Contract can be associated with contracts If status processing basis is at Group CIF level you can only maintain status codes of type Both that is applicable for both accounts and contracts In such a case you must associate the statuses at both the Account maintenance as well as for contracts It is mandatory to maintain the status code NORM Normal with the sequence number as 0 for all the status types The sequence number must not be repeated for a status type 17 2 1 Maintaining Status Codes for Contracts The following parameters need to be maintained for defining a status code Status Code This is the code which identifies the status to which the contract belongs Example Assign a code using a maximum of 3 characters alphanumeric For example if your contract has past its
304. the system According to the number of days of default defined for each status a loan would be moved from Active to PDO status then to doubtful and finally to sub standard status Similarly you can define status codes for current and savings accounts also Current and Savings accounts that have not generated any interest over a specific period or have remained inactive with interest overdue may be identified as NPAs Non Performing Asset In Oracle FLEXCUBE you can assign these accounts different status codes and define status criteria based on which the status movement will occur Refer the Core Entities user manual for details on associating status codes with a customer account class account These status codes are maintained in the Status Codes Maintenance screen 17 2 Invoking Status Maintenance Screen You can invoke this screen by typing STDSTCOD in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button Status Codes Maintenance Web Page Dialog J 2x l Status Code ASD Description Normal Status Status Sequence 12 Status Type Account Input By JUDE1 Date Time 7 3 2000 10 50 24 Modification Number 1 gw Open Authorized By JUDE1 Date Time 7 3 2000 10 50 24 fv Authorized pe ORACLE In this screen you can maintain the following to define a loan or bill account status e A unique code for the status e A brief description for
305. the system exceeds a certain limit an override will be generated by the system You can maintain transactional limits for a Module Product and Currency combination through the Product Transactional Limits Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by typing CSDPLMNT in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button ee ORACLE The screen appears as shown below Product Transaction Limits Maintenance Web Page Dialog 2 x E Module Code LD Description Loans and Deposits Product Code LDBL Description Term Loan Bearing Transaction Limit Currency USD Transaction Amount Limit 1 000 00 Fields Date Time 05 54 Modification Number 2 open Date Time 07 12 Authorized Module Code Each module in Oracle FLEXCUBE is identified by a code First you have to identify the module for which the currency wise transactional limit is to be maintained A list of all the modules operational at your bank will be displayed in the option list You can choose the appropriate module code The description associated with the module will be defaulted in the adjacent field Product Code Each module contains a number of products within it After you identify the module indicate the product within the module for which you would like to maintain a currency wise transactional limit You can select the appropriate product code from the option list In the Produc
306. tion Now Jennifer decides to open another account for the same combination In this case the sequence number gets incremented to 2 and the account will be assigned the number 000 4 1 123456 2 This will go on till the 9 account for the same combination The 9 account number would be 000 4 1 123456 9 If the customer decides to maintain the 10 account for the same combination the sequence number will restart since it has reached the maximum allowed level This would result in duplication of account numbers To eliminate this the system will now use the dummy CIF range to number the accounts Therefore the 10 account number will be 000 4 1 199000 1 This sequence will continue for subsequent accounts maintained for the same combination You can view all the dummy CIF numbers linked to a customer in the Customer Accounts Allocated Dummy CIF screen Maintaining Global Interdict Functions Click GI Functions button in the Branch Parameters Maintenance screen to invoke Branch Global Interdict Functions screen 4 28 Branch Parameters Global interdict Functions Branch Description Global Interdict Functions 1of1 Go to Page Function Identification Function Identification Specify the global indirect function 4 2 10 Maintaining Tax Cycle You can maintain tax cycle at the branch level using the Branch Parameters Tax Maintenance screen Invoke this screen by clicking Tax but
307. tion AML Daily Dr Limit Specify the anti money laundering limit for cumulative debit transaction on a day AML Cr Limit Specify the anti money laundering limit for credit transaction 2 38 AML Daily Cr Limit Specify the anti money laundering limit for cumulative credit transaction on a particular day Central Bank Code Specify the central bank code This is a code assigned to a bank by the Central Bank Head Office Cost Center Specify the code of the branch which is acting as the head office of the bank You can select the appropriate branch code from the option list Head Office Currency Specify the currency code for the head office branch You can select the appropriate currency code from the option list Customer Inactivity Period Specify the period of inactivity that results in the account to be classified into a particular category Interface Flag Check this box in order to enable integration between Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking and Oracle FLEXCUBE Corporate modules TDS Start Month Specify the month that represents the beginning of the tax year For example if the tax year is April to March this field will have a value of 4 i e April Automatic Account Number Generation Check this box to automatically generate CASA and loan account numbers The number is generated as a combination of branch product code serial number and a check digit If you do not check this box then you can generate the accoun
308. tion Current Period Description Description a Real Local Currency Cont Local Currency Real Foreign Currency Cont Foreign Currency ATM Referral Cut Off Time a Hours Minutes Euro Redenomination General Ledger Description ob Status Description auto Authorisation Conversion General Ledger Conversion Transaction Code Payment Messages Floating Rate Deferred Statement Status Generate 103 EProceed without maintaining Install CI Default Bank Operation 2 float rate Code Sector Code a Branch Code for Clearing 73 Routing No Clearing Through Branch Loan Direct Debit Generation Davs Preferences SWIFT Address Account Mask CIF Range GI Functions Maker Date Time Mod No Checker Date Time Record Status Authorization Status Suspense GL The accounting entries generated by different modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE will be passed into the specified Suspense GL account if e The GL into which the entries are to be passed is not defined or e If the GL has been closed Suspense GLs are of two types Real Suspense GL Local and Foreign Currency The accounting entries that belong to asset liability income or expense GL categories will be passed to the Real suspense GL To indicate the real suspense GL for a branch click option list and select a GL code from the option lis
309. tion Number 1 open Id Authorized a ORACLE In this screen you can specify the weekly and also the annual holidays for your branch for any year between 1 AD and 4000 AD 22 2 1 Steps to Define Yearly Holidays To define holidays for a year for instance for 2000 you have to do the following Building the calendar for the year Step 1 Select New from the Actions menu in the Application tool bar or click new icon Step 2 Enter the year 2000 or move to the year 2000 using the arrows Step 3 To build the calendar for the year 2000 click the Refresh button This button is called the refresh build up button because it builds the calendar for you Please note e On invoking the calendar of any year you will notice that Saturdays and Sundays are marked as weekly holidays This is the default setting of the system e For identification the working days are marked in black and the holidays in red e All unauthorised records appear against a blue background On authorisation of that record the background is cleared 22 2 2 Defining Holidays To define any other weekly holiday other than the default double click the day of the week listed on the top row of the screen For instance if you double click on F all Fridays in the year would be marked as holidays To clear off the default weekly holidays Saturdays and Sundays double click on sa and s written on the top row To specif
310. tion of e Branch and branch e Branch and RO e RO and HO e Branch and HO For the above mentioned reporting structure the system will offer the following pairs of branch combinations to be maintained 1 BR1 BR2 2 BR1 RO1 3 BR2 RO2 4 RO1 HO 5 RO2 HO 6 BR1 RO2 7 BR2 RO1 8 BR1 HO 9 BR2 HO 10 RO1 RO2 If you have defined through RO inter branch accounting route then you need to maintain an accounting relationship for each possible combination of e Branch and RO HO e RO and RO In the branch and RO pair the RO should be that RO to which this branch reports For the above mentioned reporting structure the system will offer the following branch pairs to be maintained 1 BR1 RO1 2 BR2 RO2 3 RO1 HO 4 RO2 HO 5 RO1 RO2 If you have defined through HO inter branch accounting route then you need to maintain an accounting relationship for each possible combination of e Branches and HO e ROs and HO For the above mentioned reporting structure the system will offer the following branch pairs to be maintained 1 HO RO1 2 HO RO2 3 HO BR1 4 HO BR2 The system has an in built auto escalation path for inter branch accounting transaction which escalates from Direct to Through RO to Through HO Example Suppose in the Bank preferences screen you have defined a direct inter branch accounting relationship But in the Inter branch Accounts maintenance screen where a
311. tion to the provisioning preferences that you specify for an account class you must also maintain the accounting roles and heads representing the GLs to which the accounting entries for provisioning must be passed for each account status You can maintain this information in the Status Details screen when you define each of the status codes Rebook Provisioning on Status Change In the Status Details screen you can indicate whether provisioning entries for an account must be rebooked when provisioning is done after an automatic status change for the account Rebooking essentially means that fresh provisioning is done after writing back the previous provisioning amount ORACLE The provisioning batch process when executed not only computes the provisioning amount it also records the current status of the account and checks whether the current status is different from the status that was prevalent when the process was previously executed If so the old provisioning amount is reversed ifthe Rebook Provision option has been set in the Status Details and the entries for the new provisioning amount are booked into the provisioning and write back GLs maintained for the current status in the Status Details If the Rebook Provision has not been set there is no reversal of the old provisioning amount and the differential provisioning entries are passed as usual into the GLs maintained for the new status 30 2 11 Maintaining Aut
312. tions Maintaining Euro Related Information In Oracle FLEXCUBE the details that you need to maintain in order to handle the EMU include e Maintaining Euro as a valid currency e Indicating if a currency is In Out Euro or Euro Closed e Maintaining Currency Redenomination details e Acommon conversion GL and a transaction code to identify the redenomination entry e Maintaining a Tolerance Limit for a currency to check against ERI information e Capturing additional settlement details Euro related information for the MT 100 and MT 202 SWIFT messages You can maintain currency related information in the Currency and the Currency Pair Definition screens Settlement details can be captured in the Settlement Instruction Details screen Maintaining Currency Details Your specifications for a currency in the Currency Definition screen determine the manner in which transactions in the currency are handled in Oracle FLEXCUBE Currency Type When maintaining a currency in the Currency Definition screen you have to specify the type of the currency You can do this in the Euro Type field Choose the appropriate option from the following e The Euro itself e An In currency ie ORACLE e An Out currency e Euro Closed National currencies of In countries are referred to as In currencies When maintaining other currencies you have to choose the Out Ccy option und
313. to access the same via the Oracle FLEXCUBE hierarchical menu 7 1 Transaction Description Specify a brief description of the transaction Transaction Literal Specify a short identifier of the transaction A literal is like a short name for the transaction For example the literal that can be used for debit of service charge can be SCD This could appear in Customer Statement Dr Cr Select one of the following options e None for Inquiry type transactions e Debit for transactions which cause a debit to account e Credit for transactions which cause a credit to account Advice Format Code Specify the advice code format This field is currently not used for any processing Transaction Type Specify the transaction code type You can select one of the following options e 1 General Debit e 2 Debit Interest e 3 Service Charge e 4 Tax Deduction e 11 General Credit Base Transaction Code Specify the base transaction code for a particular mnemonic You can select an appropriate code from the option list The current transaction code will then behave similar to the base transaction code during batch transactions Base Description The system displays the description of the base transaction code that you selected Dormant Account Post Check this box to enable posting to dormant account 7 2 Advice Generation Flag Check this box to enable advice generation Validate Cheque Status Select the appropriate o
314. to send advice prior to the customer turns major base on DOB 4 18 For details about processing of Minor to Major age limit consult the Automated End of Day manual CB Reference Number Required Check this box to indicate that the CB reference number has to be generated during authorization of the contract When you check this box here at the branch level in the Operation Ref No Slot screen the Operation field acquires the following value in its List Of Values e ALL All Operations On leaving the box unchecked here the field Operation in the Operation Ref No Slot screen acquires the following values as part of its LOV e ACC Acceptance e ADV Advance e CAC Co Acceptance e COL Collection e CON Consignment e DIS Discount e FOR Forfaiting e MSC Miscellaneous e NEG Negotiate e PAY Payment e PUR Purchase e RES Restricted LC For more information on the Operation Ref No Slot refer to the section Maintaining Central Bank Reference in the Chapter Maintenance of the user manual Bills and Collections 4 2 4 1 Specifying Back Valued Details For your branch you can specify the maximum period up to which back valued posting can be processed This restriction can be made applicable by specifying the following preferences Back Value Check Required It is used to indicate whether all back valued transactions should be validated against a specific period 4 19 Back Value
315. ton on Branch Parameters Maintenance screen Branch Parameters Tax Maintenance consolidated Certificate Required individual Certificate Required Tax Certificate Frequency Frequency Value x 4 29 Tax Cycle This is the current tax cycle for the branch This is a display field Whenever the tax cycle changes the field is updated during the date change authorization for that day Consolidated Tax Certificate Required Check this option to indicate Consolidated Tax Certificate is required for all the transactions done in the Tax Cycle This option works in conjunction with a similar option in the Customer Information Maintenance The Consolidated Tax Certificate would be generated at the frequency specified at the branch level Apart from this the certificate would also be generated at the end of the Tax Cycle The consolidated tax certificate would always display all the transactions pertaining to the current Tax Cycle Individual Tax Certificate Required Check this option to indicate Individual Tax Certificate is required for individual transactions under the selected tax category This option works in conjunction with a similar option in the Customer Information Maintenance Tax Certificate Frequency This field is enabled only if the Consolidated Tax Certificate option is checked You need to specify the frequency with which the tax certificate should be generated This would be a combination of the Tax
316. tory Data 1 Tag Identifier 2 VARCHAR2 Y HS 3 Modification 1 VARCHAR2 Y A addition Flag M modification D deletion 28 2 ORACLE Position Description Length Type Mandatory Data U unchanged Service Code VARCHAR2 Value Added Service Code Date VARCHAR2 Date of a Holiday Holiday type VARCHAR2 Code indicating type of holiday see below Special holiday info 320 VARCHAR2 Restrictions applicable if a holiday is not applicable country wide or is nota full day 28 3 ORACLE 28 1 ORACLE 29 Nostro Accounts Maintenances You can maintain all nostro accounts through Nostro Account Maintenance screen To invoke this screen type STDNOSTR in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button Nostro Accounts Maintenance New 8 Enter Query Branch Code Customer No Account Customer Name Currency Account Class Small Account Number Description Statuses Country Code _ No Debits C No Credits C Frozen Amounts And Dates Account Open Date Alternate Account Number M Options C Posting Allowed IBAN Account Number Address _ IBAN Required C Mt210 Required Back Period Entry Allowed Location Media Turnover Limit Preferences Turnover Limit Code Standing Instructions Linked Entit
317. ts to which the profit or loss on revaluation is to be posted Se ORACLE e The account to which the revaluation profit is to be debited or loss credited e The rate type to be used to revalue the GL e The transaction code for posting the revaluation entries e The rate type to be used for accounting entry based revaluation of profit and loss GLs e The transaction code that would be used to post revaluation entries due to accounting entry based revaluation of profit and loss GLs General Ledger Code This is the code of the GL account for which you are specifying revaluation parameters Transaction Code This is the transaction code under which the accounting entries would be posted to the defined revalued GL account Rate type This is the rate type to be used for revaluation of this GL Profit General Ledger If the result of revaluation is a profit the profit amount is credited to this profit GL If for a GL you have opted for revaluation split then Revaluation Profit as opposed to Trading Profit is posted into this GL Revaluation split segregates revaluation profit loss into e Trading Profit Loss Profit Loss due to revaluation of FCY entries posted into the GL during the current day e Revaluation Profit Loss Profit Loss due to revaluation of opening FCY balances excludes current day s turnover Loss General Ledger If the result of revaluation is a loss the loss amount is debited to this loss GL
318. u specify a Start Customer Number you have to indicate the End Customer Number also You will not be allowed to maintain customers beyond this range Let us assume that the End Customer No is 99999 As per the mask and the end number the last customer CIF number that is generated at your branch will be 000099999 Start Dummy Customer Number amp End Dummy Customer Number You should also maintain a dummy customer number range in this screen When maintaining a dummy range you should ensure that dummy CIFs and the actual range do not overlap with one another The dummy CIF range will be used for account number generation As explained earlier the account number can be generated based on the following account mask bbbTZCCCCCCSd Where e bbb is the branch code e T indicates the account code e Z is the currency type e CCCCCC is the CIF number of the customer e SS is the sequence number for a combination of account code currency type and customer e d is the control number generated by Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm explained earlier To recall the sequence number that is automatically generated by the system is for an account code currency type customer combination The sequence number is a single digit number from 1 to 9 This means that for the same combination you will be allowed to maintain only nine accounts To eliminate this limitation and to allow maintenance of more than nin
319. umber Numeric Account Masks with Modulo 11 and Modulo 97 as Checksum Algorithms A numeric type of mask can have a maximum of twenty numeric characters inclusive of the checksum algorithm 2 15 If you associate Modulo 11 as the checksum algorithm a single character D will be appended to the numeric mask Let us assume that you have an account mask with five numeric values nnnnn and associated Modulo 11 as the checksum algorithm The system automatically appends D to the numeric mask The generated account numbers will have the following format nnnnnD Similarly if you associate Modulo 97 with an account mask of five numeric values the system appends a double digit value of DD to the mask The generated accounts will have the following format nnnnnDD Numeric Account Masks with Modulo 11 with Weights as Checksum Algorithm The account mask with Modulo 11 with Weights algorithm can have a maximum of 13 digits It comprises of the following elements e Branch Code 3 digits Indicates the branch at which the customer account is maintained e Account Code 1 digit This will indicate the account code of the account class to which the customer account belongs During account number generation in the Customer Account Maintenance screen you need to select the account class from the option list provided The system will then convert it to the account code maintained for that account class The a
320. uring each liquidation event e You can opt to move the interest to an Unclaimed Interest GL When claimed the interest can be paid out of this GL aA ORACLE Similarly on maturity the principal can be moved to specified Principal Liquidation Account if specified or to an Unclaimed Principal GL Note the following e f you select the Move to Unclaimed GL option this specification takes precedence That is on maturity the funds will be moved directly to the respective Unclaimed GLs even if customer accounts for the principal and interest have been maintained e The Unclaimed Interest and Principal GLs are specified while maintaining an Interest and Charges IC Deposit Type product The Accounting Roles for the GLs are INT UNCLAIMED and PRN_UNCLAIMED respectively When maintaining an IC Deposit type product you have to map these Accounting Roles to the appropriate GLs maintained at your bank 30 2 22 2 Specifying Default Tenor You can define a tenor for the deposits that are opened under an account class Deposits opened under the account class will automatically acquire this tenor However you can change the tenor to suit the requirements of a specific deposit 30 2 23 Specifying Dual Currency Deposits Details Dual Currency Deposit DCD is a short term currency linked deposit through which you earn a higher interest rate than regular time deposits The Bank converts the deposit currency into the linked
321. urrency Spread Maintenance Web Page Dialog a 2 ioj xj B Branch CHO Customer az Spread Definition Percentage Currency1 z Currency2 ea Ea i E I tenor Buy Spread Sale Spread EJ z f Fields OFSSCOMAKE Date Time Modification Number Authorized Authorized By Date Time Opi In this screen for a customer and currency pair you can maintain buy and sell spreads for different tenors You need to maintain customer spreads in each branch Transactions initiated in a branch will pick up the spread s maintained for that branch Note the following e Funds Transfer Loans and Deposit contracts have tenor 0 zero Therefore you need to maintain Customer Spreads for zero tenor also e The tenor is specified in days 13 1 1 1 Specifying Spread Details When processing an FX deal involving a customer for whom you have maintained spread details the system picks up the customer spread corresponding to the tenor of the deal and builds it into the exchange rate If spread details are unavailable for a specific tenor the system picks up the spread defined for the nearest lower tenor oe ORACLE 13 1 2 For example assume for a customer and currency pair you maintain spread details for the following tenors 3 5 and 10 days When processing a deal with a tenor of 4 days involving the customer and the currency pair the system picks up the spread details defined for a tenor of three days This i
322. x to indicate the system to break the deposit accounts created and transfer the proceedings to the savings account The system breaks the deposits when the savings account does not have sufficient balance to withdraw the amount In this case the system breaks the auto deposit account and restores the savings account with balance to allow withdrawing the money Example The customer has the total balance in the account for 5675 including 650 as auto deposit He withdraws 5500 from an ATM As part of intraday batch DESWPBAT the system breaks the auto deposit account of 650 and restores the balance amount to savings So his current standings would be 175 in his savings account and he does not hold any auto deposit account 30 2 12 Maintaining Rules for Automatic Status Change If you have opted for automatic status change for all accounts belonging to an account class you have to maintain the criteria based on which the system will bring about the status change automatically You can define the different criteria in the Status Rule Definition screen Click the button Status Rule in the Account Class Maintenance screen to invoke it ce ORACLE E Status Rule Definition Web Page Dialog w lx mA Account Class TIMDT4 Description Term Deposits A c Sequence Number Derivation Rule Elements Logical Operators Status In this screen you can define five conditions for each status
323. xample if you would like to describe the decimal units of USD enter 1 The currency in the Currency field 2 The pre decimal description as Dollars 3 The post decimal description as Cents 4 Final Text to be attached to the currency You can opt to prefix or suffix an amount with its currency If you would like the suffix an amount with its currency do not choose the Text Before option If you would like to prefix an amount with its currency choose the Text Before option For example if you would like to describe USD 1000 as Dollars One Thousand choose the Text Before option ig ORACLE 11 1 11 Defining Currency Pairs Introduction In the foreign exchange markets the exchange rates for some currency pairs such as the USD GBP or USD JPY are easily obtainable since these are frequently traded The exchange rates of other currencies such as the ZAR INR South African Rand Indian Rupee which is not traded very often is determined through a third currency This third currency is usually the US dollar since the US dollar is quoted in all trading centres In the Currency pair definition screen you define the static attributes of currency pairs for which a regular market quote is readily available For other pairs which do not have a regular market quote you need to specify the third currency through which the system should compute the exchange rate This screen need not be maintained
324. y other annual holidays double click on the date the date would be marked as a holiday If you want to unmark a day specified earlier as a holiday double click on it once again You will notice that the day gets marked in black Because the change is yet unauthorised it appears against a blue background cae ORACLE 22 2 3 Annual Holidays These are the holidays you have defined for the year calendar on display You will observe that all holidays are marked in red while working days in black All unauthorised holiday dates appear against a blue background To mark a date as a holiday double click on it In case you wish to undo a date marked off as a holiday double click on it once again It changes back to a working day With each modification you make the Modification Number in the made by column below moves up serially 22 2 4 Designating Unexpected Holidays for Branch The holiday calendar for your branch is maintained in the Branch Holiday Calendar screen In addition to the holiday calendar you may need to designate certain days as holidays unexpectedly without forewarning Alternatively you may also need to roll back a previously defined holiday date or set of dates You can do this using the Unexpected Branch Holiday Maintenance screen You can invoke this screen by typing CGDUNHOL in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button E Unexpected
325. ystem will automatically generate the CIF numbers based on the mask you define here and the customer number range maintained at the branch level A CIF mask consists of a maximum of 9 digits The CIF mask could have only numbers or could be alpha numeric or could also have the branch code as a part of it For instance you can maintain the CIF Mask as bbbnnnnnn where bbb represents a three digit branch code and nnnnnn represents a 6 digit number GL Mask You can indicate a mask for the general ledgers that are maintained for your bank The mask that you define here will be enforced whenever a General Ledger is created in the Chart of Accounts screen A GL mask can consist of a maximum of nine alphanumeric characters It can be built using a combination of numbers and letters to indicate for instance the category of the GL asset liability etc the GLs hierarchical position and so on Each element used to define the mask would represent a single character To represent an alphabet of the English language indicate a To represent a number indicate n The last character would be a D or d which indicates a check digit generated by the system Fora numeric check digit define it as d for an alphanumeric check digit define it as D You may use any of the following punctuation in the GL mask e dash e comma e asterisk e Full Stop e Forward slash 2 6 2 1 4 2 Example Y

Core Services User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents